Dell Compellent Storage Center Configuration Guide

Storage Center™ System Manager Version 6.3

Administrator’s Guide

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Document Number: 680-019-013 Revision Date A

January 2013

Description Initial release in support of version 6.3.

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings Note: Indicates important information that helps you complete a procedure.

Caution: Indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. Warning: Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in property damage, personal injury, or death.

Copyright Notice and Trademarks © 2013 Dell Inc. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the Dell logo, and Compellent™ are trademarks of Dell Inc.

Contacting Dell Technical Support Services For technical support, go to support.dell.com/compellent/.

Contents 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Requirements for System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Starting Storage Center System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Respond to Startup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 View the System Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Storage Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 System Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Set Controller and System IP Address for IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Manage Unmanaged Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Change the Admin Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Create Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Configure User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Create Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Apply Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Review Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Create Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Monitor Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Monitor Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2 Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Volume Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable Volume Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Mapping Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View General Properties for all Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Properties for Specific Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Multiple Volumes for a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map a Volume to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map a Volume to Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dell Compellent

13 14 14 15 16 17 17 17 17 21 22 24 25 26

iii

Contents

Remove Mappings from a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select a Logical Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrict Mapping Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Multipathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Read-Only Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Mapping to Down Server Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Import Data to Lowest Tier Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Import to Lowest Tier Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Boot from SAN Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Volume Space Consumption Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Replays to Coalesce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset VMS Unique Disk ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Volume Cache Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Notes to a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a Deleted Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empty the Recycle Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expand a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Notes to a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Volumes to a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrate a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume Folder in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map a Volume to a Server in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an External Device with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volumes or Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replication Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Replay Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Statistics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Charts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daily Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a Replay Profile to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

26 27 27 28 30 30 30 31 31 33 34 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 39 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 42 42 43 44 45 45 47 47 47 47 48 48 50 54 55 56 57 58

59 60 60 60 61

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Contents

Creating Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Non-Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a One-time Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a Daily Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a Weekly Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a Monthly Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Attached to a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Replays Attached to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Individual Replay Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Profile Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Profiles Attached to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a Rule from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change a Non-Consistent Replay Profile to a Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change a Consistent Replay Profile to a Non-Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Replays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Volume Maximums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Immediate Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Immediate Replay from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pause a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resume a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pause Replays for an Individual Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resume Replays for an Individual Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean Up Orphaned Volume Replay Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Volume Replay Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a Volume Replay Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a View Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Consistency Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Volumes from Consistency Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replay Profile General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replay Profile Volumes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping an External Device to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing a QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit QoS Definition Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Limit Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Definition Replications Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Definition Properties General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dell Compellent

62 63 65 67 67 67 68 69 69 69 70 70 71 72 72 72 72 72 73 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 77 77 78 79 79 81 81 83 83 84

85 86 88 90 95 95 96 97 98 98 99 100 101 102

v

Contents

QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 QoS Definition Properties Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions for Servers Created by FluidFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Mapped to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Details about Volumes Mapped to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Mapped to a Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Server Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Single Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Operating System of a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Mappings from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New Server for a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Server to Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a Server from Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert a Server to a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Promote Server Cluster Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demote Server Cluster Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Virtual Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Virtual Host Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Server Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Server Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Servers to a Server Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Servers to a Different Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add HBAs to a Server from a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Define an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove HBAs from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a Server Connectivity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Topology Explorer Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New Server with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New Server Folder with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Information General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server HBAs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Connectivity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Mapping Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Volumes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Charts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

106 106 106 107 108 108 108 109 109 110 110 113 113 114 114 115 115 118 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 124 125 126 126 127 127 127 127 128 128 129 130 131 131 132 133 134 134 135 135 136 137 138 139 140

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Contents

6 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Setting Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Controller Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Controller IP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Controller Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Controller Performance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the Back of a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Controller Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC IO Port General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC IO Card Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC IO Card Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set FC IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Preferred Physical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Control Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Advanced iSCSI Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI IO Card Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Performance Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change an iSCSI Control Port Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change iSCSI Control Port IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the iSCSI Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the iSCSI Card Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Digest Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Timeout Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing SAS Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS IO Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS IO Card Connectivity Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS Port Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS Port Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS IO Card Performance Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Remote iSCSI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Advanced Remote Connection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete iSCSI Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Remote CHAP Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Remote CHAP Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dell Compellent

142 142 142 142 143 144 145 145 146 147 147 149 150 151 153 153 154 155 155 157 158 159 159 160 161 161 161 162 162 162 163 163 163 164 164 164 165 166 166 167 168 169 169 170 170 172 173 173 174 174 174 174

vii

Contents

Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change CHAP Authentication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Remote CHAP Initiators from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plan a Hardware Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign a New Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Usage Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebalancing Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller CPU PerformanceTab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Back Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller IP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Info Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176 180 180 180 181 181 182 182 183 184 185 186 186 188 188 189 190 191

7 Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Tier Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Unassigned Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release a Managed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revert a Released Disk to Managed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert for Disk with Single Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebalancing RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Rebalance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAID Rebalance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a RAID Rebalance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a RAID Rebalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a RAID Rebalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Disk Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a Storage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Storage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Profiles Provided in System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Profiles for SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identify a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Storage Profile Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

194 194 194 195 195 196 198 200 201 202 202 202 203 204 205 205 206 206 207 207 208 208 209 209 209 210 212 212 213 214 214 214 215

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Contents

Apply a Storage Profile to a Single Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Configured with a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a User-Created Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Storage Profile in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a Storage Profile Created in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change RAID Stripe Width in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Disk Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disk Enclosure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure Hardware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215 215 216 216 216 217 217 218 218 218 219 219 220 220 222 223

8 System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Modifying System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename the Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the System Management IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select RAID Stripe Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determine if Data Progression is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set System Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Global Disk Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Login Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Optional Information about Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure iSNS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Syslog Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submit a License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Unmanaged Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Unassigned Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Phone Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone Home Immediately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the Phone Home Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure a Phone Home Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Current Local Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Fault Domains (FC and iSCSI only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset Default Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert to Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure iSCSI IO Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dell Compellent

226 226 227 228 229 229 230 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 240 242 242 243 243 244 244 245 245 247 248 250 251 252 253 254 255

ix

Contents

Add iSCSI Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create IP Filter for Current User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Access Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure the SNMP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure a Secure Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Secure Console Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restart Secure Console Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate a New SSL Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset the License Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Storage Center Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check for an Update Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Download an Available Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Automatic Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Update Package Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decide How to Apply Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutting Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Shut Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn on Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn on Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Online Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Available Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Storage Consumption Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Data Progression Pressure Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volume Distribution Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Responding to the Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the System Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acknowledged Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding More Information About an Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Storage Alert Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Storage Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Data Progression Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Cache Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Disk Sparing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

x

256 257 258 259 261 261 262 262 263 263 263 263 265 266 266 268 270 270 271 272 273 274 274 275 275 276 276 276 276 277 277 279 280 282 283 283 284 284 284 284 285 285 285 286 286 287 288 289 290 290 291 292 293 294

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Contents

System Properties Message Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 System Properties Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

9 Users and User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Privilege Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Account Management and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Requirements for External Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing an Account Management Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Directory Services Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Local User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grant Access to a Directory User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grant Access to a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Directory User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify User Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Local User Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downgrade User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrade User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Access for a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Whether Users Can Change Their Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Default Volume Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Default Volume Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Storage Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Replay Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Mapping Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Default Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a folder from a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Folder to a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a User Group to a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a User Group From a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add or Remove a Mapping from a Local User Group to a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information About All Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information About an Individual User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

298 298 298 298 299 299 300 306 306 307 308 310 311 314 314 314 314 315 315 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 326 327 328 328 329 329 329 330 331 331 332

A Server HBA Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Queue Depth Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings by HBA Vendor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cisco Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emulex Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dell Compellent

335 335 336 336

xi

Contents

LSI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Qlogic iSCSI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings by Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Citrix XenServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP-UX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM AIX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Novell Netware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oracle Solaris Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SuSE Linux SLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMWare Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

338 339 340 341 341 341 341 342 342 342 343 343 343

B iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Flow Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Ports and Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi-directional Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumbo Frames and Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

345 345 345 345 346 347

C UPS User FAQ and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 UPS User FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring an APC™ UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify or Delete a Trap Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Liebert™ UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinitialize the UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

350 352 356 356 359

D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

E Port Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

xii

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

1

Getting Started This section provides an overview of Storage Center System Manager and identifies the steps to get started.

Contents Starting Storage Center System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Navigating the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Overview Storage Center System Manager provides a central management interface to create and manage Storage Center volumes, servers, disks, and users. Use System Manager to: •

Provision volumes and map them to servers.

•

Display the status of hardware components.

•

Manage local backup and restore.

•

Phone Home information to Dell Technical Support Services.

•

Set up users and access privileges.

In addition to the System Manager, Storage Center provides a rich set of separately licensed applications that support dynamic storage. To view currently licensed applications, select Licensed Features from the Help menu. Note: Figures in this document show views, menus, and options displayed when logged in with Admin privileges. Users logged in as Volume Manager or Reporter will see only the options that their privileges allow.

Dell Compellent

1

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Requirements for System Manager Storage Center System Manager is a Java applet that requires the use of a Java plugin to run. The minimum software requirements for running System Manager are given below. Component

Requirements

Web browser

•

Windows Internet Explorer versions 7, 8, and 9

•

Windows Internet Explorer Desktop version 10 (Internet Explorer Modern version 10 is not supported)

•

Mozilla Firefox on Microsoft Windows

Note: Other web browsers may work but are not officially supported. Java

•

Java version 6 or later

•

When using Java 7, open the Java Control Panel and make sure that the option Enable Java content in the browser is selected

.

Note: Storage Center System Manager cannot load with the following unique combination of applications: Windows 2008 (64-bit), Mozilla Firefox 3.0, and Java 6.

Starting Storage Center System Manager Access Storage Center System Manager from a workstation or computer on the same network as the Storage Center controller. Log on to System Manager Follow these steps to log on to System Manager. 1 In the address bar of the Web browser, enter the name or IP address of the management controller. If you are using IPv6 addressing, for initial login use the IPv4 address of the management controller. After logging in, you must set the IPv6 address and IPv6 Prefix in the controller properties. 2 Click Yes or Continue to acknowledge the messages and alerts. The Storage Center System Manager logon dialog box appears.

2

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Starting Storage Center System Manager

3 In the User field, enter the default administrator user name: Admin

4 Enter the administrative password for Storage Center. If a new password has not been set, enter the default password: mmm

5 Click Login. If an additional security alert(s) appear, click Yes and Run to continue. Note: The End User License Agreement is displayed the first time a new user logs on to Storage Center. Click Accept to continue. See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142

Respond to Startup Messages Messages about ports or hardware may appear upon system startup that require action.

Unbalanced Local Ports If a controller has been added or taken offline, ports can become unbalanced. If local ports are unbalanced, you are prompted to balance the ports. •

Balance unbalanced ports: In the message dialog box, click Yes to rebalance local ports.

•

Turn off the rebalance ports message: a Select the Controllers node icon in the System Tree by right clicking on it. b From the shortcut menu, select Rebalance Local Ports. c Uncheck the option to check for unbalanced local ports at startup.

IO Card Change Detected If an IO card change is detected on system startup, Storage Center automatically launches the IO Card Change wizard. See Also Managing IO Card Changes on page 181

Unmanaged Hardware If the System Manager finds unmanaged hardware, such as disks or server host bus adaptors (HBAs), it prompts you to manage them. See Also Managing Disks on page 195

Dell Compellent

3

Chapter 1 Getting Started

View the System Dashboard The center pane of the System Explorer opens to the system dashboard with Storage Summary and Storage History displayed.

If a Storage Center system has more than one disk folder, the System Manager displays a Storage Summary and Storage History for each disk folder. The upper pane shows the Storage Summary in a graph and in list form. Field

Description

Blue banner

Date and time when the summary was generated.

Status

Current status of storage utilization. When the Free disk space available falls below the Low Space Threshold (10%), the Status value changes to Space Low.

Total disk space

Amount of raw disk space available (gold in the bar graph).

Used disk space

Space used by volumes and replays (blue in the bar graph).

Free disk space

Space available for volumes and replays (gray in the bar graph).

Unhealthy/Bad Space

Space (if any) found on any unhealthy disks, or any bad space found on disks that are healthy. This appears only if unhealthy or bad disk space has been found (black in the bar graph).

More Details

Link to Online Storage view, which contains charts that detail storage use and trends.

The lower pane shows Storage History in a chart that tracks disk use over time.

4

•

The Blue banner shows when the history was generated.

•

The Blue line shows the amount of space used recently.

•

The Red line shows the amount of raw disk space available.

•

The Yellow line shows the Low Space Threshold.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Navigating the Interface

Navigating the Interface This section describes the main elements of the System Manager user interface.

Storage Management Menu The Storage Management menu is located in the upper-left corner of the main pane. Click the Storage Management menu to see the menus and options for viewing and configuring Storage Center.

Dell Compellent

5

Chapter 1 Getting Started

View Menu The View menu provides multiple ways to configure a system or view system properties. Options are specific to each individual view. After a specific view is displayed, the tab for that view appears in the upper pane of the System Explorer window for the remainder of the current session. Click View to open the View menu.

If more tabs are available than can be displayed, the window displays scroll arrows to the far right of the view tabs. Click the arrows to scroll through the open tabs.

Context Menu Context menu commands that apply to commands currently being used appear near the top of the System Explorer window. If there is not sufficient room to display all context menu commands at the top of the window, a down arrow is displayed. Click the arrow to display all commands shown in the shortcut menu. See Also Shortcut Menu on page 7

6

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Navigating the Interface

System Tree Expand component folders in the System Tree to view individual components. The System Tree displays the system components of a Storage Center.

Shortcut Menu The shortcut menu provides easy access to specific options for the selected item. Rightclick an item in the System Tree to view the shortcut menu for that item. Shortcut menu

Context menu commands

Down arrow

Search Function The Search box in the lower left provides the ability to search through the System Tree for objects with matching names. A drop-down menu allows filtering objects by type. A check box is provided to match case (default). Arrows allow you to navigate forward and backward. The arrow to the left of the search field allows you to minimize/maximize the search panel.

Dell Compellent

7

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Next Steps This section identifies basic tasks that you may need to perform after your first log on to Storage Center System Manager. These tasks are configuration dependent and not all tasks are required at all sites.

Set Controller and System IP Address for IPv6 If you are using IPv6 addressing, you must set the Management IP address in the Controller Properties and in the System Properties. Make sure that you set the controller IP addresses first. See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142 Set the System Management IP Address on page 227

Manage Unmanaged Disks It is usually assumed that disks attached to the Storage Center controller were identified and assigned during installation. If not, Storage Center recognizes unmanaged hardware and asks that you manage (assign) it. Storage Center groups disks into a disk folder to create a pool of storage from which volumes are created. See Also Manage Unassigned Disks on page 198

Change the Admin Password The default administrator password is mmm. It is recommended that you change the default before Storage Center is put into production. See Also Change Local User Passwords on page 314

Create Servers Creating a server means to identify it to a Storage Center using the Create Server wizard. You can also communicate with the server using iSCSI CHAP by adding remote CHAP initiators. See Also Managing Single Servers on page 110 Managing Server Clusters on page 115 Managing Virtual Servers on page 124 Add a Remote CHAP Initiator on page 174

Configure User Volume Defaults Access to Storage Center is based on volumes and volume settings. See Also Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults on page 319 Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324

8

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Next Steps

Create Volumes Depending on the configuration at your site, you may need to create volumes to organize data and users. See Also Create a Volume on page 17 Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22

Apply Replay Profiles A Replay Profile is a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or more volumes and the time at which Replays are deleted (expired). Replays create spaceefficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. System Manager provides standard replay profiles, and you also can create replay profiles that fit specific needs. In either case, you must apply a replay profile to each volume before it is included in any replay activity. See Also Replay Profiles on page 59

Review Storage Profiles Storage Profiles determine how to move data most effectively within Storage Center. By default, a storage profile is applied to each volume. When licensed, Storage Center uses Data Progression to write and move data so that the most active blocks of data remain on high-performance solid state drives (SSDs) or Fibre Channel drives, while less active blocks automatically move to lower-cost, high-capacity SAS drives. This is the most effective storage profile for typical Storage Center use. If you are using Solid State Drives (SSDs) or are working with Dell Technical Support Services to manage data movement, you may need to create or apply a different storage profile. See Also About Storage Profiles on page 212

Create Users Users have access to folders, volumes, views, and commands depending on their privilege level and the User Groups to which they belong. User accounts can be created locally and/ or exist externally in a directory service. See Also Users and User Groups on page 297 Enabling Directory Services Authentication on page 300 Managing Users on page 306 Managing User Groups on page 326

Dell Compellent

9

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Monitor Alerts Alerts warn you of component failure when Storage Center requires attention. The status of Storage Center is indicated by the color of the System Status icon in the top-right corner of the main pane. System Manager also displays alert information in a separate tab in the main window. See Also Alert Indicators on page 284 Alert Categories on page 284 Alert Status on page 284 View the System Alert Monitor on page 285

Monitor Disk Drive Consumption Disk drives that are managed by Storage Center are contained in a disk folder, which is simply a logical grouping of physical drives. Disk folders can contain a mixture of drive types, capacities, and speeds. The total capacity of the disk folder is the sum of the capacities of the drives within the folder. See Also Viewing Online Storage Summary on page 277 Monitoring Storage Space on page 287

Add Space as Required Storage Center allocates disk space from a disk folder for volume and Replay use as needed based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. As Storage Center approaches the end of the disk space available within the disk folder, it generates an alert, warning you to add additional space. See Also Space Warnings on page 286 Conservation Mode on page 286 Emergency Mode on page 286 Adding Space on page 289

10

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Next Steps

Monitor Volumes When you select a volume the System Tree, System Manager opens an informational view specific to the volume, with tabs that allow you to view performance and disk space usage information for the volume.

View Volume Statistics Volume statistics show information about disk space usage for the selected volume. Note: Volume statistics are not available when Data Progression is running. See Also Volume Statistics Tab on page 56

View Volume Charts Volume charts show read and write performance in real time. See Also Volume Charts Tab on page 57

View Volume Distribution Reports Volume Distribution Reports show how volumes are consuming storage space. Information includes the logical space of each volume that is consumed, and the relationship between logical space and physical space. See Also View Volume Distribution Reports on page 282

Dell Compellent

11

Chapter 1 Getting Started

12

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

2

Volumes A volume is a logical unit of storage that servers can access over a network. On Microsoft operating systems, a volume is assigned a drive letter. On UNIX/Linux systems, a volume is assigned a mount point.

Contents Viewing Volume Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Creating and Mapping Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Advanced Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Managing Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Managing Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Using the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 User Interface Reference for Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Dell Compellent

13

Chapter 2 Volumes

Viewing Volume Information Volumes appear in the System Tree under the Storage node. This section describes the icons used, and provides general information about the content displayed in System Manager.

Volume Nodes When you select a node in the System Tree, System Manager displays information about the node in a View window. Node Selected

Information Displayed

Volumes

Lists volumes and volume folders. For each volume not included in a folder, the window displays the volume status, volume type, logical size, profile, Storage Profile, Storage type, and Disk folder.

[Volume Folder]

Lists each volume in the folder, and the volume status, volume type, logical size, Replay profile, Storage Profile, Storage type, and Disk folder.

[Volume]

Shows information specific to the selected volume organized in tabbed windows by information type: General, Copy/Mirror/ Migrate, Replays (if licensed), Replay Calendar, Statistics, and Chart Replication. The Replication tab shows status about the current replication activity, and appears for a volume only for the duration of a replication. Enterprise Manager creates and manages replications.

See Also User Interface Reference for Volumes on page 48

14

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Volume Information

Volume Icons System Manager uses icons to indicate volume node, folders, and types. Icon

Volume Type Volume node — all volumes

Volume folder

Standard volume mapped to a server(s)

Standard volume not mapped to any server

FluidFS volume Note: Volumes created using the FluidFS file system cannot be modified or deleted using Storage Center System Manager. Therefore, for these volumes: •

Shortcut menus customarily displayed when right-clicking on a volume are disabled. Context menu commands customarily displayed near the top of the System Explorer window are disabled.

•

For additional information about FluidFS, see your FluidFS documentation. For information about adding, removing, and monitoring FluidFS clusters using Enterprise Manager, refer to the Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide.

Source volume for a replication to a remote Storage Center. Note: This icon is also displayed for volumes that have been configured to Copy, Mirror, or Migrate in the Storage Center System Manager. Destination volume for a replication from a remote Storage Center

Primary Live Volume is the volume currently replicating to a secondary Live Volume. Secondary Live Volume is the Live Volume to which the primary Live Volume is replicating.

Note: Replays and Replay Profiles appear if a Storage Center is licensed for Data Instant Replay. Replication information appears in a tab for the duration of the Replication. See Also Shortcut Menu on page 7

Dell Compellent

15

Chapter 2 Volumes

Portable Volume Node Enterprise Manager creates and manages portable volumes. After Enterprise Manager has created a portable volume, the portable volume node appears in the Storage Center System Tree if the Storage Center is licensed for Remote Instant Replay and if any of the following are true: •

A USB disk is connected to the Storage Center.

•

Data was copied to a portable volume.

•

A volume was or is waiting to be restored from a portable volume.

See Also Portable Volume on page 58

16

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating and Mapping Volumes

Creating and Mapping Volumes User access to volumes is controlled by user groups and associated volume folders and volumes. Therefore, group volumes into folders based on the way you want to control user access. You can then create a corresponding user group and grant access to that volume folder or volume.

View General Properties for all Volumes The volume properties displayed vary based on your user volume defaults. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Storage node. 2 Select the top-most Volumes icon. 3 In the toolbar, click Volume Properties– Multiple Volumes dialog box appears. 4 Click the General tab (if not already selected). The dialog box displays information about the volumes and the total volume space configured.

View Properties for Specific Volumes Volume properties provide similar information as the View window, but also provides controls to enable or disable read and write cache. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Storage node. 2 Select the top-most Volumes icon. 3 In the main window, select a volume or select multiple volumes by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and selecting more than one volume. 4 In the toolbar, click Volume Properties. 5 On the Volume Properties dialog box click the General tab (if not already selected). This dialog box displays information about the selected volume(s).

Create a Volume If some options shown in the following examples do not appear when creating and configuring volumes, it is because your user volume default options were configured to disallow these choices. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Create→ Volume. 2 The Create Volume wizard prompts you to select a disk folder for the volume to use. The disk folder contains the physical disks the volume will use for storage. Select the disk folder. 3 Click Continue. A page appears asking you to select the redundancy level you would like to use. 4 Click either Non-Redundant or Redundant. Note: If the disk folder chosen has not been prepared for the redundancy type chosen, a page opens with instructions for preparing the disk folder. Follow the instructions and click Continue when done. The wizard prompts you for a volume size.

Dell Compellent

17

Chapter 2 Volumes

5 Enter the volume size and select a unit of measure from the drop-down menu. System Manager passes this size to the server when the volume is mounted. Note: The Advanced button is displayed only if your User Volume Defaults allow you to modify the Storage Profile and cache settings to be used by the volume. 6 Click Continue. If Data Instant Replay is licensed for your Storage Center, the Replay Profile page appears.

7 Select an existing Replay Profile, or click Create a New Replay Profile. For more information about creating Replay profiles, see Creating Replay Profiles on page 62. 8 Click Continue. The wizard displays a page listing current folders.

18

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating and Mapping Volumes

9 Select an existing folder in which to create the volume or click Create a New Folder to create a new folder. 10 Enter a volume name or accept the default. 11 (Optional) Add notes. 12 Click Continue. System Manager displays volume attributes.

13 Review the attributes. If correct, click Create Now. The last page displays a confirmation of the volume creation and presents options available after creating a volume. Depending on your configuration, some or all of the following commands may appear on this page.

Dell Compellent

19

Chapter 2 Volumes

14 Perform additional tasks or click Close to exit the wizard.

20

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating and Mapping Volumes

Create Multiple Volumes Use the Create Volumes wizard to create multiple volumes in a single operation. 1 Right-click on the volume or volume folder node and select Create→ Volumes. The Create Volumes wizard starts, displaying a default volume to create.

2 Select whether to copy the attributes of the selected volume or use the default user attributes when adding a volume. •

If Copy the selected volume when adding a volume is selected, select the volume to copy from the list of volumes and click Add Volume. The added volume copies all attributes except the name from the volume selected in the volume list. The number in the name of each volume increments by one: Volume 1, Volume 2, and so on. Note: If you want to modify the attributes of a volume before creating it, see step Step 4 on page 23.

•

If Use My Volume Defaults when adding a volume is selected, click Add Volume. The added volumes uses your user volume defaults to create the volume.

3 Click Create Volumes Now. System Manager creates the volumes specified. See Also Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22

Dell Compellent

21

Chapter 2 Volumes

Create Multiple Volumes for a Server Use the Create Volumes wizard to create multiple volumes and map them to a server in a single operation. If you intend to add multiple volumes with similar attributes, you should modify the first volume in the list, then copy the attributes from this volume when adding additional volumes. Note: Adding a volume to the volume list in the Create Volumes wizard does not cause the volume to be created. Volumes are only created when you select Create Volumes Now. 1 In the System Tree, select a server, server cluster, or virtual server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Volumes. The Create Volumes wizard starts. By default, the name of the volume is based on the name of the server.

3 Select whether to copy the attributes of the selected volume or use the default user attributes when adding a volume. •

If Copy the selected volume when adding a volume is selected, select the volume to copy from the list of volumes and click Add Volume. The added volume copies all attributes except the name from the volume selected in the volume list. The number in the name of each volume increments by one: Volume 1, Volume 2, and so on. Note: If you want to modify the attributes of a volume before copying it, see step Step 4 on page 23.

•

If Use My Volume Defaults when adding a volume is selected, click Add Volume. The added volumes uses your user volume defaults to create the volume.

22

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating and Mapping Volumes

4 (Optional) Follow these steps to modify the attributes of a volume in the Create Volumes wizard. a Click Modify Selected Volume. The wizard displays a page that contains the volume attributes that can be changed. Note: The volume attributes that you can change depend on your user volume defaults.

b Modify the attributes as needed. c Click Apply Changes to save changes and return to the volume list. 5 (Optional) To remove a volume from the Create Volumes wizard, select the volume to remove and click Remove Selected Volume. 6 Click Create Volumes Now. If the Map volumes to this server using default settings upon creation check box is selected, the new volumes will be automatically mapped to the selected server using default mapping options.

Dell Compellent

23

Chapter 2 Volumes

Map a Volume to a Server Mapping enables servers to connect to volumes. By mapping the volume to a server you create the link from the volume to the server. This link is used to access the volume. 1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped (gray) volume. Expand the Storage node if necessary. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Server. A list of servers is displayed.

3 Select a server to which to map the selected volume. 4 Click Continue.

5 Click Create Now. The volume is mapped. See Also Configuring User Volume Defaults on page 317

24

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating and Mapping Volumes

Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster To create multiple volumes automatically mapped to a server, see Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume folder or the Volumes node. Volumes in the selected folder or selected node are listed. 2 Select an unmapped (gray) volume, or use the key to select more than one unmapped volume.

3 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volumes to Server. A list of servers appears. By default, the last server you selected is chosen as the server to which to map the volume. From here, you can: •

Accept the selected server or server cluster.

•

Choose a different server or server cluster.

•

Create a server or server cluster to which to map the volumes.

4 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 5 (Optional) Click Advanced to modify advanced mapping settings. This page of the wizard displays advanced options available when mapping selected volumes to the selected server. Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center configurations. 6 Click Map Volumes Now. The volume is mapped to a single server. An exception to this is if the server is part of a server cluster. Note: When creating a server cluster, Storage Center attempts to map an included volume to the same LUN on all cluster servers. If the LUN selected is not available on a particular server, the mapping is not performed and the volume is only partially connected to the cluster. See Also Using Advanced Mapping Options on page 27

Dell Compellent

25

Chapter 2 Volumes

Map a Volume to Remote System Mapping a volume to a remote system causes the volume to appear as a remote volume on the remote system. The volume can then be used as a Replication target. 1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped (gray) volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Remote System. A list of remote systems appears. 3 Select a remote system, then click Continue. 4 (Optional) Click Advanced to restrict mapping paths. From here you can: •

Restrict the path to one transport, such as FC or iSCSI.

•

In a clustered-controller system, select a controller to which to map the volume.

5 Click Continue. 6 System Manager asks you to confirm. To confirm, click Create Now. See Also Volume Icons on page 15

Remove Mappings from a Volume Follow these steps to remove the mappings from a volume. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove Mappings from Volume. The Remove Mappings from Volume wizard appears. 3 Select the mapping(s) to remove. 4 Click Continue. The mappings confirmation page appears. 5 Click Remove Mappings Now. If a mapping is still active, System Manager asks you to confirm. Before removing the mapping, confirm that the volume is no longer in use by the server. If you remove a mapping to a volume that is in use, the server will no longer have access to the volume and will have read/write errors.

26

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using Advanced Mapping Options

Using Advanced Mapping Options To view advanced options, make sure that Allow Advanced Mapping is enabled in your User Volume Mapping Defaults.

Select a Logical Unit Number Use the Advanced Mapping options to specify the LUN to use when mapping a volume to a server. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Storage node and select an unmapped volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Server. A list of servers is displayed. 3 Select the server to which to map the volume and click Continue. 4 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page, click Advanced. The Advanced option page appears. 5 Click Advanced. The Advanced options page appears. Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center configuration. The options you see may differ from options displayed on the sample window shown below.

Dell Compellent

27

Chapter 2 Volumes

6 Select a Logical Unit Number. •

If the volume you are mapping is a boot volume, select Map Volume using LUN 0. LUN 0 is reserved for boot volumes. If the volume you are mapping is not a boot volume, make sure this option is cleared. If a volume has already been mapped to the selected server using LUN 0, this option does not appear.

•

To map the selected volume to the server using a specific LUN, select and enter a LUN.

•

By default, Storage Center uses a different LUN if the specified LUN is already in use. To use the next available LUN, select Use Next Available LUN. If you do not want to use a different LUN when the specified LUN is already in use, clear Use Next Available LUN.

7 Click Continue. See Also Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324

Restrict Mapping Paths These options appear only when mapping a volume to a server with multiple server HBA ports, when mapping a a volume to a server on a dual-controller Storage Center, or when mapping a volume to a virtual server. 1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped volume. Expand the storage node if necessary. 2 Select the server to which to map the volume and click Continue. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page, click Advanced. The Advanced option page appears. Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center configuration. The options you see may differ from options displayed on the sample window shown below.

28

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using Advanced Mapping Options

4 Choose the option that applies to the type of server to which you are mapping this volume: •

If the selected server has HBA ports of different transport types (such as Fibre Channel and iSCSI), the Only map using a specified transport type option appears. To map a volume using a specified transport type, select the check box and select the transport type to use.

•

If the selected server has multiple server HBA ports, the Only map using specified server ports option appears. To map a volume using specified server ports, select the check box and select the ports to use.

•

To map a volume to a specific controller, select the Map to controller checkbox and select a controller.

•

To map a volume to a host on a virtual server, select whether to map the volume to the Host only, Virtual server only, or Both host and virtual server.

5 Click Continue.

Dell Compellent

29

Chapter 2 Volumes

Configure Multipathing Use the Map Volume to Server wizard to set the number of paths to use for multipathing. Note: If the server operating system does not support multi-pathing, this option is not displayed. 1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped volume. Expand the storage node if necessary. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Server. A list of servers is displayed. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page, click Advanced. The Advanced option page appears. 4 Select the maximum number of paths used to map the selected volume to the server. The maximum number of paths allowed may be limited by the server’s operating system. 5 Click Continue.

Create a Read-Only Volume To prevent data from being written to a volume, set the properties to be read-only. 1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped volume. Expand the storage node if necessary. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Server. A list of servers is displayed. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page, click Advanced. The Advanced option page appears. 4 Under Configure Volume Use, select the check box to present this volume as read-only. 5 Click Continue.

Create Mapping to Down Server Ports This selection appears only if the selected server has down ports. 1 In the System Tree, select an unmapped volume. Expand the storage node if necessary. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Map Volume to Server. A list of servers is displayed. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page, click Advanced. The Advanced option page appears. 4 Under Down Server Ports select the check box to enable mapping to down server ports.

5 Click Continue.

30

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Volumes

Managing Volumes This section describes tasks for maintaining and managing volumes after they are set up and mapped to servers.

Enable Import Data to Lowest Tier Mode Use Import Data to Lowest Tier to write large amounts of data to the lowest tier of storage configured for a volume. This is useful when performing an operating-system-level copy of data to a Storage Center volume from a server-attached data source. No Replays are taken for the volume during data import. If this option is cleared, by default data is written to the highest tier of storage configured for the volume. 1 In the System Tree, select a target volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears.

3 Click the Advanced tab. The Volume Properties dialog box displays advanced options.

Dell Compellent

31

Chapter 2 Volumes

4 Select the Import data to lowest tier of storage checkbox. When this checkbox is selected, data is written to the lowest tier of storage available based upon the configuration of the storage profile of the volume. No Replays are taken for the volume during data import. If this option is cleared, by default, data is written to the highest tier of storage configured for the volume. Note: Import mode is not allowed for volumes that are mapped to another Storage Center for use as Replication destinations. The Import data to lowest tier of storage option is not displayed on the Volume Properties screen. Importing data is managed in Enterprise Manager as part of the Replication to that volume. For more information, see the Enterprise Manager User Guide. In the System Explorer, information about the volume that is set for importing data to the lowest tier appears with a message stating that data is being imported to the lowest tier of storage.

32

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Volumes

While a volume is in Import to lowest tier mode, replays are not taken for that volume. Replays are resumed when the volume is taken out of import mode. Note: After data is imported, it is your responsibility to take the volume out of Import to lowest tier mode.

Disable Import to Lowest Tier Mode After data is imported to the lowest tier, return the volume to normal operating mode. 1 Select the volume that has been placed into import to lowest tier mode. From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 2 Clear the Import data to lowest tier of storage checkbox. 3 Click OK. The volume is no longer in import mode.

Dell Compellent

33

Chapter 2 Volumes

Create a Boot from SAN Volume Boot from SAN dramatically reduces the time to recover servers by creating and storing Replays of the boot volume at the disaster recovery site. The Boot from SAN function allows servers to use an external SAN volume as the boot volume for the server. In the event of a failure, power up a spare server, point the server to a boot image on the SAN, and boot the server up. Prerequisites To use the Create Boot from SAN Copy wizard, you must already have a boot from SAN volume created and in use. A boot from SAN volume is operating system-dependent and requires the server HBA to be specifically configured and enabled to boot from the SAN. See your respective operating system and HBA provider to create this configuration. Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Create Boot from SAN Copy. The Create Boot from SAN Volume wizard starts.

2 Click Continue. A page asking you to select a source volume appears. 3 Select a source volume from the list of volumes. 4 Click Continue. The next page prompts you for the name and folder for the volume. 5 Select a name and folder or accept the default. 6 Click Continue. The next page prompts you to create a Replay.

34

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Volumes

7 Click Create Now. The Map Volume to Server wizard starts.

8 Create a new server or server cluster, or accept the defaults. 9 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears.

Dell Compellent

35

Chapter 2 Volumes

10 (Optional) Click Advanced to set Advanced Mapping options, which allow you to: •

Enter a logical unit number (LUN).

•

Restrict mapping paths

•

Configure volume use as read-only

11 Click Create Now. The boot from SAN volume is created. •

If Data Instant Replay is enabled, select or change a Replay Profile attached to the volume.

•

If Data Progression is licensed, select a Storage Profile attached to this volume.

See Also Using Advanced Mapping Options on page 27

Change Volume Space Consumption Limit Use this option to limit the size of the selected volume. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Select or clear the Enforce Volume Space Consumption Limit check box. 5 Enter a Space Consumption Limit value and select the units. 6 Click OK.

Allow Replays to Coalesce Use this option to change the setting that allows Replays to coalesce into an active Replay. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Select or clear the Allow Replays to coalesce into active Replay check box. 5 Click OK.

Reset VMS Unique Disk ID If there are volumes on storage running the Open VMS operating system, this tab displays the Unique Disk ID (UQ ID) used to identify the volume. You may need to reset this value when recovering a volume from a Replay. For example, if you mapped a volume to a server, took a Replay, and then mounted a new view volume up to the server; the new view volume would have a new Disk ID and you would have to modify the value to match the original Disk ID for the volume before the server will recognize it as the same volume. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Enter the UQ ID. 5 Click OK. 36

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Volumes

Change Volume Cache Properties Data caching can be set at the volume level, however caching that is set Storage Centerwide overwrites individual volume cache settings. Note: Because an SSD is itself a memory device, Dell Compellent recommends disabling write cache for all volumes using SSDs to maximize performance for most applications. Disabling read cache for volumes using SSDs is application-specific and may or may not improve performance. Dell Compellent recommends testing applications prior to disabling read cache. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Click the Cache tab. 4 Do one of the following: •

Select or clear the Enable Write Cache checkbox. When enabled, write performance increases by holding written data in volatile memory until it can be safely stored on disk.

•

Select or clear the Enable Read Cache checkbox. When enabled, read performance is improved by anticipating the next read and then holding it in volatile memory.

5 Click OK to save changes.

Rename a Volume Follow these steps to change the volume name. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 Click Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Enter a new name for the folder. 4 Click OK.

Add Notes to a Volume Folder Follow these steps to add notes to the volume properties. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 Click Properties. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Click the Info tab. 4 Enter information about the volume in the Notes field. 5 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

37

Chapter 2 Volumes

Delete a Volume Follow these steps to delete a volume and move it to the Recycle Bin. You can recover the volume from the Recycle Bin, but after the Recycle Bin is emptied, data on that volume cannot be recovered. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager informs you if the volume is actively mapped to a server and asks you to confirm.

Caution: If you select the Skip Recycle Bin and delete volume check box, the volume and metadata are immediately deleted and cannot be recovered. Selecting this check box is not recommended. 3 Click Yes. The volume is deleted.

Delete Multiple Volumes Follow these steps to delete multiple volumes from within a volume folder. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume folder. The list of volumes appears in the main frame. 2 Select volumes to delete by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key and clicking on volumes. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager warns you if a volume is mapped to a server and prompts you to confirm the deletion. 4 Click Yes. The volumes are deleted.

38

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Volumes

Restore a Deleted Volume When a volume is deleted, it is moved to the Recycle Bin. You can restore a deleted volume from the Recycle Bin. However, after the Recycle Bin is emptied, items that were in the bin cannot be restored. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Volumes node to view volume components including the Recycle Bin node. 2 Expand the Recycle Bin node. The Recycle Bin lists restorable volumes. 3 Select the volume to be restored. 4 From the shortcut menu, select Restore Volume. The volume is restored, but previous mappings are not restored.

Empty the Recycle Bin Deleting a volume moves data on the volume to the Recycle Bin. You can recover data from the Recycle Bin until the Recycle Bin is emptied. After the Recycle Bin is emptied, you can no longer recover the data. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Empty Recycle Bin. System Manager lists items in the recycle bin and asks you to confirm. 2 Click Yes. The Recycle Bin is emptied.

Expand a Volume Virtual capacity can be expanded to be greater than the physical capacity. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Expand Volume. The Expand Volume wizard starts. 3 Specify the new size for the volume in the New Volume Size field. 4 Click Expand Volume Now.

Dell Compellent

39

Chapter 2 Volumes

Managing Volume Folders Use Volume folders to group volumes based on the way you want to control user access. You can control access to volume folders and volumes through a combination of User Groups and User Privileges.

Create a Volume Folder Follow these steps to create a volume folder. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Create →Folder →Volume Folder. The Create Volume Folder wizard starts. 2 Select whether to create the folder at the root level or within another folder.

3 Enter a volume folder name, or accept the default name. 4 (Optional) Add notes. 5 Click Create Now. The volume folder is created.

Rename a Volume Folder Follow these steps to change a volume folder name. 1 In the System Tree, expand Volumes. 2 Select a volume folder. 3 Click Properties. The Volume Folder Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 4 Enter a new name for the folder in the Volume Folder field. 5 Click OK.

40

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Volume Folders

Add Notes to a Volume Folder Follow these steps to add notes to the volume properties. 1 In the System Tree, expand Volumes. 2 Select a volume folder. 3 Click Properties. The Volume Folder Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 4 Click the Info tab. 5 Enter information about the folder in the Notes field. 6 Click OK.

Delete a Volume Folder You cannot delete a volume folder that contains volumes, other volume folders, or is referenced by volumes that are in the Recycle Bin. 1 In the System Tree, expand Volumes. 2 Select a volume folder. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Yes. The folder is deleted.

Move Volumes to a Folder Follow these steps to move a volume or volumes to a different folder. 1 In the System Tree, expand Volumes. 2 Select a volume folder, or select multiple volumes by holding down the key or key and clicking on each volume. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Move to Folder. The Move — Volume(s) wizard starts. 4 From the list of folders, select a folder to which to move the volume. 5 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 6 Click Move Now. The volumes are moved to the selected folder.

Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes Replays create space-efficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes. A list of Replay Profiles appears.

Dell Compellent

41

Chapter 2 Volumes

3 Select one or more Relay Profiles or create a new Replay Profile. 4 Choose to replace existing Replay Profiles attached to the volumes mapped to this server or not. 5 Click Save Configuration. The Replay Profiles are attached. See Also Creating Replay Profiles on page 62.

Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions Data can be moved from one volume to another using any of three methods—copy, mirror, or migrate—depending on the intended result. These functions move data within a Storage Center.

Copy a Volume Copy copies data from a source volume to a destination volume. Changes made to the source volume during the copy process are added to the destination volume. Copy does not dynamically update the destination volume after the copy is completed. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Copy→ Copy Volume. The Copy Volume wizard starts. 3 In the Copy Volume wizard, select one of the following: •

Select a Destination Volume: Copies the source volume to the selected destination volume. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a server.

•

Create New Volume: Creates a new volume to be the destination of the copy operation.

•

Create Exact Duplicate: Creates a volume with the same attributes as the source volume. The duplicate volume is immediately created.

See Also Create a Volume on page 17

42

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions

Mirror a Volume Mirror dynamically updates the destination volume when the source volume changes. The source and destination volumes are kept synchronized. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Copy→ Mirror Volume. The Mirror Volume wizard starts. 3 In the Mirror Volume wizard, select one of the following: •

Select a Destination Volume: To mirror the source volume to an existing volume, select a destination volume from the list of volumes displayed. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a server.

•

Create New Volume: Creates a new volume to be the destination of the mirror operation.

•

Create Exact Duplicate: Creates a volume with the same attributes as the source volume. The duplicate volume is immediately created.

See Also Create a Volume on page 17

Dell Compellent

43

Chapter 2 Volumes

Migrate a Volume Migrate is the same as Copy, except that when the copy is finished, all volume-to-server mappings are moved to the destination volume and the source volume is deleted. The copied data (and its mappings) now reside on the destination volume. Copy/Migrate first copies data from the source volume to the destination volume. Changes to the source volume while the copy is in progress are reflected in the destination volume. When System Manager is finished with the copy, all volume-to-server mappings are moved to the destination volume. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 From the volume shortcut menu, select Copy→ Copy/Migrate. The Copy/Migrate Volume wizard starts. 3 In the Copy/Migrate Volume wizard, select one of the following: •

Select a Destination Volume: Migrate the source volume to an existing destination volume from the list of volumes displayed. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a server.

•

Create New Volume: Create a new volume to be the destination of the migrate operation.

•

Create Exact Duplicate: Create a volume with the same attributes as the source volume. The duplicate volume is immediately created.

4 To migrate data to an existing volume, select a destination volume from the list of volumes displayed. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume. The destination volume cannot be mapped to a server. 5 Click Continue. Copy/Migrate options are displayed. •

(Conditional) Click Continue to migrate now. A review page appears.

•

(Conditional) Click Start to mirror the volume now.

•

(Conditional) Click Schedule to schedule the migration at a later time. Enter a date and time. Click Schedule Now.

See Also Create a Volume on page 17

44

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using the Topology Explorer

Using the Topology Explorer With Topology Explorer you can easily map volumes to servers and external (remote) Storage Centers by dragging one component to another.

Open the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to open and navigate the Topology Explorer. 1 From the View menu, select Topology Explorer. The Topology Explorer displays objects associated with the Storage Center: servers in the left column, volumes in the middle column and external Storage Center in the right column. If a Replication is in process, connections between the volumes and the Remote volume to which they are replicating are also shown.

Dell Compellent

45

Chapter 2 Volumes

2 Click on the Connections icon to toggle between Show All Connections and Show Connections for Selected Object Only.

3 Click on the Folders icon in the upper right to toggle between displaying and hiding folders.

46

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using the Topology Explorer

Note: When the Topology Explorer displays folders, two additional command objects appear at the bottom of the window: Create New Server Folder and Create New Volume Folder.

Create a Volume in the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Create Volume wizard. 1 Drag the New Volume command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create Volume wizard starts. 2 Follow the Create Volume wizard instructions.

Create a Volume Folder in the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Create Volume Folder wizard. 1 Make sure the Show Folders toggle is enabled and the Show Folder command object appears. 2 Drag the New Volume Folder command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create Volume Folder wizard starts. 3 Follow the Create Volume Folder wizard instructions.

Map a Volume to a Server in the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Map Volume to Server wizard. 1 Drag a server onto a volume or drag a volume onto a server. The Map Volume to Server wizard starts. 2 Follow the Map Volume to Server wizard instructions.

Create an External Device with the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Classify Disk as External Device wizard. 1 Drag the New External Device command object to the Topology Explorer. The Classify Disk as External Device wizard starts. 2 Follow the Classify Disk as External Device wizard instructions.

Dell Compellent

47

Chapter 2 Volumes

User Interface Reference for Volumes This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show volume information.

Volumes or Volume Folders When you select a Volume or Volume Folder, System Manager lists the volumes associated with the selection.

Field

Description

Name

Name of the volume or folder.

Type

Object type — volume or a volume folder.

Status

Shows volume status — Up or Down.

Status Information

If an element is down, displays reason it is down. Also displays the controller on which the volume is active.

Volume Type

48

A Volume Type may be one of the following: •

Dynamic Write: A volume for which no Replays have been taken. Exists on the Storage Center as a read/write volume. Data Progression manages the volume allocations in configure Volume Active space only.

•

Replay Enabled: A volume that has at least one Replay. A Replay-enabled volume consists of two different layers of volume space: Active (writable) and Replay (historical, or readonly). After a Replay is taken on a volume, the active data that exists on that volume is marked as read-only and is moved to the Tier and Class that is configured for Replays. New data written to the volume after the Replay is written to active portion of the volume; however the Replay area may still be accessible for reads. As more changes to the volume occur (as writes in the active space) and as more Replays are taken, some of the Replay data may become inaccessible. This is known as Replay overhead. This data can be made available by creating a view volume to allow for data recovery or backups.

•

Replication: Target volume being replicated from another Storage Center.

Logical Size

Logical size of the volume.

Replay Profile

Name of Replay profile attached to the volume.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Volumes

Field

Description

Storage Profile

Name of Storage Profile attached to the volume.

Storage Type

Default is 2 MB Redundant.

Disk Folder

Name of folder the volume in which the volume reside (if any).

See Also Viewing Volume Information on page 14 Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210

Dell Compellent

49

Chapter 2 Volumes

Volume General Tab Selecting a volume in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across the top. Each tab provides information about the volume. The Volume General tab provides an overview of the selected volume.

Note: Tabs displayed may differ depending on features licensed on your Storage Center. Field

Description

Name

Name of the volume.

Index

Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification.

Size

Size of the volume.

Serial Number

Volume Serial Number (VSN).

Folder

Disk folder that the volume uses for storage, in any.

Volume Type

May be one of the following: •

Active: Volume for which no Replays have been taken.

•

Replay Enabled: Volume for which a Replay has been taken.

Disk Folder

Folder the volume uses for storage (if any).

Status

Volume status — Up or Down. Also displays the name of the controller on which the volume is active. If a volume is not mapped to a server, System Manager displays the message: “Down (currently inactive - map to a server to activate)”.

50

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Volumes

Field

Description

Replay Profiles

Replay Profiles used for this volume (if any).

Storage Profile

Profile attached to this volume.

Cache Settings

Settings enabled for various read/write operations.

Volume Statistics

Number of requests, blocks, and errors for read/write operations.

Date Created / Date Updated Date of creation/update and by whom. Notes

Optional notes about the volume.

See Also Viewing Volume Information on page 14

Dell Compellent

51

Chapter 2 Volumes

Volume Mapping Tab The volume Mapping tab shows to what server the selected volume is mapped. Use this tab to add, change, or delete volume mapping.

Field

Description

Server

Name of the server to which the volume is mapped.

Folder Path

Name and path of volume folder (if applicable).

Status

Indicates whether the link is Up or Down.

Type

Transport type: FC or iSCSI.

Server Port

WWN of the server port to which the volume is mapped.

Controller Port

WWN of the controller port to which the volume is mapped.

LUN

Logical unit number assigned (if applicable).

Read Only

Indicates whether the advanced option is set to make the volume Read Only.

See Also Map a Volume to a Server on page 24 Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster on page 25 Map a Volume to Remote System on page 26 Remove Mappings from a Volume on page 26 Using Advanced Mapping Options on page 27

52

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Volumes

Volume Copy/Mirror/Migrate Tab The Copy/Mirror/Migrate tab shows status and history of CMMs for the Volume.

Field

Description

Type

Specifies the type of CMM operation: copy, mirror, or migrate.

State

Specifies the state of a CMM operation: down, running, or synched

Priority

Specifies the priority of a CMM operation: high, medium, or low.

Source Volume

Name of volume from which data is being copied.

Destination Volume

Name of volume to which data is being copied.

Percent Synced

Percentage that destination volume matches source volume.

Remaining

Percentage of data left to copy.

Current Replay

ID of latest Replay.

Copy History

History of Replays.

Delete After Migrate

Indicates wether source volume is deleted after a copy.

Reverse Mirror After Migrate

Copy back to original source after migrate.

See Also Copy a Volume on page 42 Mirror a Volume on page 43 Migrate a Volume on page 44

Dell Compellent

53

Chapter 2 Volumes

Replication Tab Replications are managed by Enterprise Manager. You can view replication status during the replication process. Note: The Replication tab appears only if the volume is currently being replicated.

54

Display

Description

List of Replications

In the top frame, the System Manager displays a list of replications for the volume.

Replication Information

From the list of replications in the top frame, select a replication. The main pane displays information about that replication.

Replication History

In the right frame, the System Manager displays the replications that were taken of that volume on the remote Storage Center you selected from the list of replications.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Volumes

Volume Replay Tab When you select the Replay tab in the Volume view, System Manager displays Replay history for the selected volume.

Field

Description

Freeze Time

Point in time when Replay was taken.

Expiration Time

Date and time when Replay will expire.

Replay Size

Amount of disk space used.

Description

Replay schedule.

State

Whether replay is Active, Frozen, or Expiring.

Source

How the replay was created. See the icons following this table.

Create Volume

Volume name.

Space Recovery Run

Whether Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery program was run.

The key at the bottom of the window describes the icons used. Icon

Description Replay created by a user. Replay created automatically from a Replay Profile. Replay created from an external application program. Replay created through a Replication from a remote Storage Center. Type of replay: Consistent or Non-consistent. Replay is nearing expiration date. Replay is coalescing with other data.

Dell Compellent

55

Chapter 2 Volumes

See Also Replay Profiles on page 59

Volume Statistics Tab The volume Statistics tab shows disk space usage information for the selected volume.

56

Field

Description

Volume Space – Active

Volume space utilized by the data that has been written before a Replay is taken.

Disk Space – Active

Total disk space including RAID overhead that is being used by this volume.

Volume Space – Replay

Space used by Replays, including accessible and inaccessible Replay space.

Disk Space – Replay

Total disk space, including RAID overhead, being used by this volume.

Total volume space consumed

Sum of all volume space bars on the chart.

Data Instant Replay overhead

That part of Volume Space – Replay that is inaccessible. This inaccessible data is previous pages that have been subsequently written to but are still parts of previous Replays. (Total volume space consumed minus Data instant Replay overhead equals the total volume space that would be consumed if all Replays were to be expired.)

Total disk space consumed

Equals Disk Space – Replay plus Disk Space – Active.

Disk space saved vs. basic RAID 10 storage

Display of storage savings through the effective use of RAID 5 rather than RAID 10. The difference between volume space consumed and disk space consumed is the space required for RAID parity. For example, a RAID 10 volume is written twice. The disk space required is twice the volume space required. Disk space is required for RAID 5 parity blocks that is not used in the volume space.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Volumes

See Also View Volume Statistics on page 11

Volume Charts Tab The volume Charts tab displays read and write performance for the most current one-hour period. The upper chart shows the data transfer rate in KB/second. The lower chart shows the overall IO rate in IOs/second.

•

Red Line: Reads

•

Blue Line: Writes

•

Green Line: Combined

See Also View Volume Charts on page 11

Dell Compellent

57

Chapter 2 Volumes

Portable Volume The Portable Volume node appears at the same level in the tree as the Storage node.

Field

Description

Name

Portable Volume to destination Storage Center name.

Classification

USB.

Capacity

Total capacity of the disk.

Free Space

Remaining free disk capacity.

% Full

Used disk capacity expressed as a percentage.

Allocated

Disk space allocated to the portable volume.

Control Type

Removable.

Health

Status of the disk.

Vendor

Disk vendor name.

Product

Disk product name.

Serial Number

Disk serial number.

See Also Portable Volume Node on page 16

58

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

3

Replay Profiles A Replay Profile is a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or more volumes and the time at which Replays are deleted (expired). Replays create spaceefficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. Storage Center Replays differ from the traditional PITCs because blocks of data or pages are frozen and not copied. No user data is moved, making the process efficient in both time taken to complete the Replay, and space used by Replays. This process is called Data Instant Replay and is a licensed Storage Center Feature.

Contents Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Creating Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Modifying Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Working with Replays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Recovering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Dell Compellent

59

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes All Storage Centers come with two common default Replay Profiles: Daily and Sample You are not required to create any custom Replay Profiles.

Daily Replay Profile The rules for the standard Daily Replay Profile are as follows: •

The standard Daily Replay Profile takes a Replay once a day at one minute past midnight (12:01 AM) of all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached.

•

Each Replay automatically expires in one week.

Sample Replay Profile The Sample Replay Profile takes three Replays for all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached. The rules for the Standard Default Sample Replay Profile are as follows: •

Monthly Replays are taken on the first day of the month. Monthly Replays automatically expire after 26 weeks.

•

Weekly Replays are taken on Saturday at 11:30 PM. Weekly Replays automatically expire after 5 weeks.

•

Daily Replays are taken every twelve hours between 12:05 AM and 6:00 PM. Daily Replays automatically expire after 5 days. Note: If multiple Replays are scheduled to run at the same time, System Manager takes a single Replay that includes the multiple Replays, running the Replay with the latest scheduled expiration time.

See Also Creating Replay Profiles on page 62

60

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes

Apply a Replay Profile to a Volume One or more Replay Profiles can be applied to one or more volumes. After a Replay Profile is applied to volumes, subsequent changes to the Replay Profile are applied to all the volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Apply to Volume(s). The Apply Replay Profile wizard starts, listing volumes. 3 Expand volume folders, if necessary.

4 Select volumes to which to apply the profile. 5 If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, select the Replace Existing Replay Profiles check box. If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, clear the Replace Existing Replay Profiles check box. 6 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 7 Click Apply Now. Note: Subsequent changes to the Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes using the Replay Profile. Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future. Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the profile.

Dell Compellent

61

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

Creating Replay Profiles Replay Profiles are a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or more volumes and how long before Replays are deleted (expired). A Replay Profile can contain multiple rules. For example, a Replay Profile can require a Replay to be taken once a day, once a week, or once a month. •

Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future.

•

Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the Replay Profile.

Storage Center has two types of Replay Profiles: Consistent and Non-Consistent. Consistent Replay Profile

Non-Consistent Replay Profile

Halts IO across all volumes as a group

Halts I/O for each volume independently of other volumes.

Resource intensive

Less resource intensive – depends on the amount of data written since the previous Replay

Limited to 40 volumes

No limit to the number of volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached

Replays are taken of all volumes simultaneously Choose between Serial (one volume at a time) or Parallel (all volumes simultaneously) Can set an Alert if Replays cannot be completed All Replays are taken within a defined time. Replays not completed before alert is generated are not taken. (This can lead to incomplete groups of Replays across volumes.)

62

Can delete incomplete group of Replays

All Replays are taken

Can be converted to Non-Consistent Replay Profile

Can be converted to Consistent Replay Profile

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating Replay Profiles

Create a Non-Consistent Replay Profile Non-Consistent Replays halt I/O for each volume independently of other volumes. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay Profile. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts.

3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. 5 Click Add Rule. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 6 In the Schedule Type list, select the frequency to run the Replay: •

Once: Select the date and time to run the Replay and when to expire the Replay.

•

Daily: Either select the time to run the Replay, or select how often to run the Replay in a specified period of time, and then select the Replay expiration time.

•

Weekly: Select the day(s) to run the Replay, select how often to run the Replay, and then select the Replay expiration time.

•

Monthly: Select the day(s) or date(s) of the month to run the Replay, select how often to run the Replay, and then select the Replay expiration time. To specify the months of the year to run the Replay, click Select Months.

7 Click Continue. The wizard displays the schedule and expiration for the rule. 8 Click Create Now. The rule is created and appears in the System Tree.

Dell Compellent

63

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

9 (Optional) Apply the rule: Option

Description

Apply to Volume(s)

Select the volume(s) to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile.

Apply to Server

•

If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, unselect the Replace existing Replay Profiles checkbox.

•

If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

Select the server to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile. Note: The Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes currently mapped to this server. If additional volumes are mapped to the server at a later time, the Replay Profile will not be applied to those volumes. •

If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server, unselect the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

•

If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server, select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

10 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 11 Click Apply Now. Note: Subsequent changes to the Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes using the Replay Profile. Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future. Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the profile.

64

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating Replay Profiles

Create a Consistent Replay Profile Consistent Replay Profiles maintain a consistent set of Replay data across multiple volumes. To ensure consistency, volume IO is halted for all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Consistent Replay Profile. The Create Consistent Replay Profile wizard starts with a warning that Consistent Replay Profiles can cause IO time outs.

3 Click Continue. The Create Consistent Replay Profile wizard starts.

4 Enter a name for the Rule in the Name field.

Dell Compellent

65

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

5 Enter notes (up to 255 characters) about the Replay profile in the Notes field. 6 Click Add Rule. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 7 In the Schedule Type list, select the frequency to run the Replay: •

Once: Select the date and time to run the Replay and when to expire the Replay.

•

Daily: Either select the time to run the Replay, or select how often to run the Replay in a specified period of time, and then select the Replay expiration time.

•

Weekly: Select the day(s) to run the Replay, select how often to run the Replay, and then select the Replay expiration time.

•

Monthly: Select the day(s) or date(s) of the month to run the Replay, select how often to run the Replay, and then select the Replay expiration time. To specify the months of the year to run the Replay, click Select Months.

8 Click Continue. The wizard displays the schedule and expiration for the rule. 9 Click Create Now. The rule is created and appears in the System Tree. 10 (Optional) Apply the rule: Option

Description

Apply to Volume(s)

Select the volume(s) to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile.

Apply to Server

•

If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, unselect the Replace existing Replay Profiles checkbox.

•

If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes, select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

Select the server to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile. Note: The Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes currently mapped to this server. If additional volumes are mapped to the server at a later time, the Replay Profile will not be applied to those volumes. •

If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server, unselect the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

•

If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server, select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox.

11 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 12 Click Apply Now. Note: Subsequent changes to the Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes using the Replay Profile. Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future. Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the profile.

66

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating Replay Profiles

Schedule a One-time Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will run one time. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay Profile. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. 5 Click Add Rule. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 6 In the Schedule Type list, select Once for a one-time Replay Profile. 7 Enter a time period in minutes, hours, days, or weeks after which the Replay will expire. 8 Click Continue. The wizard displays the schedule and expiration for the rule. 9 Click Create Now. The Replay Profile appears in the list of Profiles.

Schedule a Daily Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will at the same time each day. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay Profile. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. 5 Click Add Rule. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 6 In the Schedule Type list, select Daily for a daily Replay Profile. 7 Choose a time for a Daily Replay Profile: either once a day or at a chosen time. •

Once a Day: Click in the Hour or Minute field. Select the up or down arrows to scroll to the time when the Replay will be taken.

•

Selected Daily Time Period: Enter a time interval in hours or minutes. To restrict daily Replay Profiles, select the hours between which the Replay is taken.

8 Enter an expiration interval in minutes, hours, days, or weeks after which the Replay will expire. 9 Click Continue. 10 Enter a name or accept the default. Enter any notes (up to 255 characters). 11 Click Create Now. The Replay Profile appears in the list of Profiles.

Schedule a Weekly Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will run at the same time each week. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay Profile. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. 5 Click Add Rule. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 6 In the Schedule Type list, select Weekly.

Dell Compellent

67

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

7 Select one or more days of the week. 8 Select either a time each day for a Replay, or an interval. If you select an interval, you can limit the number of Replays by choosing the hours during which Replays will be taken. 9 Chose an expiration interval in minutes, hours, days, or weeks after which the Replays expire. 10 Click Continue. The next page displays the schedule and expiration for the rule. 11 Click Create Now. The Replay Profile appears in the list of Profiles.

Schedule a Monthly Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will at the same time each month, either on the same day of the month or on the same date each month. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay Profile. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. 5 Click Add Rule. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 6 In the Schedule Type list, select Monthly.

Monthly By Day a Click the red Days tab. b Select one or more days of the week to schedule the Replay. c Select one or more weeks of the month to schedule the Replay. d Select the time of day to run the Replay or select how often to run the Replay and the hours during which the Replay can run.

Monthly By Date a Click the blue Date tab. b Select one or more dates to schedule Replays. c Select the time of day to run the Replay or select how often to run the Replay and the hours during which the Replay can run. d Chose an expiration interval after which the Replay will be deleted. a To specify the months of the year to run the Replay, click Select Months and select one or more months in the dialog box and click OK. 7 Click Continue. 8 Click Create Now. The page displays the schedule and lifetime for the Replay.

68

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying Replay Profiles

Modifying Replay Profiles Any custom Replay Profile can be changed. The default Daily and Sample profiles cannot be modified.

View Volumes Attached to a Replay Profile Follow these steps to see which volumes are running a specific Replay Profile. 1 In the System Tree, select a Replay Profile. 2 In the main pane, click the Volumes tab. System Manager displays all volumes attached to the profile.

View Replays Attached to a Volume Follow these steps to see a list of Replays that have been run on a specific volume. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for the volume.

3 (Optional) Modify the display by selecting any of the following: •

Refresh—Refreshes the display.

•

Set Update Frequency—Allows you to turn off updates or set a new frequency.

•

Set Replay View—Toggles between the default view and volume tree view.

•

Set Display Field—Allows you to reorder display fields.

•

Modify Volume Maximums—Opens the Modify Volume Maximums wizard.

See Also Modify Volume Maximums on page 74

Dell Compellent

69

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

View Individual Replay Properties Follow these steps to see general information about a Replay Profile. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. The main pane displays general volume information. 2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for that volume. 3 From the list of Replays, select a specific Replay. 4 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Replay Properties dialog box appears.

5 If you change expiration time or description, click OK.

Change Profile Schedule Follow these steps to change a Replay schedule. 1 Select a Replay Profile. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Modify. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts. 3 Select a Rule in the Replay Profile. 4 Click Modify Rule. 5 Change the frequency of the Replay. 6 Click Continue. 7 Click Apply Changes. System Manager changes the rule.

70

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying Replay Profiles

Change Profiles Attached to a Volume Follow these steps to add a Replay Profile to a volume. 1 In the System Tree, select a Replay Profile. 2 Click the Volumes tab. 3 Select the volume(s) to change. 4 Click Configure Data Instant Replay in the main pane. The Configure Data Instant Replay wizard starts and displays all Replay Profiles.

5 Choose profiles to attach to the selected volume(s). A cumulative list of Replay schedules for all selected profiles appears in the bottom frame. 6 Click Save Configuration to apply the Replay Profiles to the volumes or click Create a New Replay Profile. See Also Creating Replay Profiles on page 62

Dell Compellent

71

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

Remove a Rule from a Replay Profile Follow these steps to delete a rule from a Replay Profile. 1 Select a Replay Profile. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Modify. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts. 3 Select a rule to remove from the Replay Profile. 4 Click Remove Rule. The Rule no longer appears in the Schedule Rules of the Replay Profile. 5 Click Apply Changes. System Manager removes the rule. The Replay Profile page reappears, showing that the Rule is deleted.

Rename a Replay Profile Follow these steps to change the name of a Replay Profile. Note: Renaming a Replay Profile does not change profile rules. 1 Select a Replay Profile. From the shortcut menu, select Modify. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts. 2 In the Name field, enter a new name. 3 Click Apply Changes. The Replay Profile page reappears, showing the new Replay Profile name.

Change a Non-Consistent Replay Profile to a Consistent Replay Profile Follow these steps to change a Non-Consistent Profile to a Consistent Profile. 1 In the System Tree, select the Replay Profile to change. 2 From the Shortcut menu, select Convert to Consistent Replay Profile. System Manager describes Consistent Replay Profiles. 3 Click Convert Now. The Replay Profile is changed from Non-Consistent to Consistent.

Change a Consistent Replay Profile to a Non-Consistent Replay Profile Follow these steps to change a Consistent Profile to a Non-Consistent Profile. 1 In the System Tree, select the Replay Profile to change. 2 From the Shortcut menu, select Convert to Non-Consistent Replay Profile. System Manager describes Consistent Replay Profiles. 3 Click Convert Now. The Replay Profile is changed from Consistent to NonConsistent.

Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile Before you can delete a profile, you must first detach all associated volumes. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 Select the Replay Profile attached to the volume to change. 3 In the main pane, click the Volumes tab to view a list of volumes that use the selected Replay.

72

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying Replay Profiles

4 Select a volume. 5 Click Configure Data Instant Replay. A list of Replay Profiles appears. Replay Profiles to which the volume is attached are indicated by a check mark in the check box. 6 Clear the check box of the Replay Profile to detach it from the Volume. 7 Click Save Configuration. System Manager displays volume information. 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for each volume. When no volumes are attached to the Replay Profile, you can delete the profile.

Delete a Replay Profile Follow these steps to delete a Replay Profile. Note: You cannot delete a Replay Profile created by System Manager or a Replay Profile currently in use by a volume(s). 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 Select a Replay Profile to remove. 3 In the main pane, click the Volumes tab to view a list of volumes that use the selected Replay. If any volumes appear in the pane, detach them from the profile. 4 After detaching volumes, select the Replay Profile in the System Tree. 5 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. 6 System Manager prompts you to confirm. 7 Click Yes. The Replay profile is deleted.

Dell Compellent

73

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

Working with Replays Replays can be modified, deleted, paused, and run independently from the schedule. This section describes tasks for managing Replays.

Modify Volume Maximums Use this wizard to modify the maximum number of volumes or the maximum configurable volume space allowed for a Replay history. Note: You cannot create additional volumes for a Replay history if the maximum volume count or maximum configurable volume space values have been reached. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Volumes and select a volume. 2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for the volume. 3 Click Modify Volume Maximums.

a Modify the Maximum Volume Count. b Modify the Maximum Configured Volume Space and select the measurement of size using the drop-down menu. c Check the Unlimited check box to select an unlimited amount of configured volume space. 4 Click OK.

Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly Follow these steps to manually expire a Replay without waiting for the expiration date set in the Profile. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Volumes and select a volume. 2 In the main pane, select the Replays tab. A list of unexpired Replays for that volume appears. 3 Select a Replay, or use the or keys to select more than one Replay. 4 Click Expire. System Manager asks you to confirm. 5 Click Yes. The Replay is set to be expired. Replay expiration may take a few minutes, depending on the size of the Replay.

74

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Working with Replays

Create an Immediate Replay Replays are best used by creating a Replay Profile, attaching it to a volume, and letting System Manager run the Replays on a set schedule. However, you can run a Replay manually at any time. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Volumes and select one or more volumes. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Replay→ Create Replay. 3 Enter an expiration interval and a description of the Replay. 4 Click Create Now. A Replay is taken of the volumes you selected. 5 Select a volume. Click Replays. The new Replay appears in the list of Replays for that volume.

Create an Immediate Replay from a Replay Profile Follow these steps to run a Replay using an existing Replay Profile. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 Select a Replay Profile. 3 (Optional) To view volumes, click the Volume tab. A list of volumes appears. 4 From the shortcut menu, select Create Replay for Volumes. The Create Replay for Volumes wizard starts.

5 Enter a time for Replays to expire in minutes, hours, day, weeks, or never. 6 Click Create Now.

Dell Compellent

75

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

Pause a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center Follow these steps to temporarily stop Replays on all volumes. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Replay→ Pause Replay Creation. Pausing Replay creation disables both manual and scheduled Replays for all volumes. 2 If you are sure you want to disable Replays, click Continue. Replays are disabled. While Pause Replay is enabled, no Replays are taken for any volumes.

Resume a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center When all Replays are paused, the Storage Management menu changes. Follow these steps to resume Replays. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Replay→ Resume Replay Creation. The Resume Replay Creation wizard starts.

2 Click Continue. System Manager resumes Replays.

Pause Replays for an Individual Volume Follow these steps to temporarily stop Replays on a specific volume. 1 In the Storage Tree, select Replay→ Pause Replay Creation. 2 The system asks you to confirm. Click Continue. Replays are paused.

Resume Replays for an Individual Volume A volume for which Replays have been paused appears as a Replay-paused volume. 1 In the storage tree, select Replay→ Resume Replay Creation. 2 Click Continue. System Manager resumes Replays for the volume.

76

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Working with Replays

Clean Up Orphaned Volume Replay Histories Volume histories can become orphaned when the process of deleting a volume is interrupted. When a volume history becomes orphaned, the disk space it consumes is not released and cannot be used by other volumes. Eliminate orphaned histories to free up disk space for other volumes. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Clean Up Orphaned Replay Histories. The Clean Up Orphaned Replay Histories page appears with a list of orphaned Replays. System Manager asks you if you want to delete the orphaned volume histories. 2 Click OK. Orphaned volume histories are deleted.

Change Volume Replay Displays Follow these steps to change the Replay information displayed in the main pane. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. The main pane displays volume information. 2 Click the Replay tab. (This tab appears only if Replays are scheduled for the volume.) 3 From this page, select Set Display Field. The Set Display Field menu appears.

4 Choose to display:

Dell Compellent

•

Freeze Time — The time each Replay was taken.

•

Expire Time — The time at which each Replay will expire.

•

Replay Size —The size of each Replay.

•

Replay Description — The rule that caused the Replay to be taken.

77

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

View a Volume Replay Calendar Follow these steps to display a graphic schedule of Replay activity. 1 In the System Explorer pane, select a volume. 2 Click the Replay Calendar tab. The System Manager displays the Replay calendar. Replays are color-coded.

3 Click Previous Month and Next Month to view previous or projected months. Click the arrows to the right of the schedule to change the color of the Replay schedule bar graph.

78

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Recovering Data

Recovering Data The purpose of the Replay is to provide a point-in-time copy that you can recover if data is lost or corrupted. This section describes the tasks required to recover data.

Create a View Volume Create a View volume from a Replay of the volume in which the file was stored, and then map the volume to a server. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. 2 Click the Replays tab. A list of Replays for that volume appears. 3 Select a Replay. From the shortcut menu, select Create Volume from Replay.

The Create Volume for Replay wizard starts.

Dell Compellent

79

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

4 Accept the default or enter a new name. 5 Click Create Now. The Map Volume to Server wizard starts.

6 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 7 Click Create Now. The Apply Replay Profile page appears. 8 Click Apply Replay Profile or Skip. The volume is created. See Also Create a Server on page 110 Create a Server Cluster on page 115

80

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Recovering Data

View Consistency Groups After a consistent Replay has been taken across selected volumes, the group created from the consistent Replay appears in the Consistent Replay window. 1 In the System Tree, select a Consistent Replay Profile. 2 Click Consistency Group. A page appears showing the volumes attached to the group, the freeze time, and the amount of time necessary to complete creation of all Replays in the group.

Create Volumes from Consistency Groups Follow these steps to create volumes from Consistency Groups. 1 In the System Tree, select a Consistent Replay Profile. 2 Click Consistency Group. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Create Volumes for Consistency Groups. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups wizard starts. 4 System Manager enters default names for the new volumes. Accept the default or enter a name in the New Volume Name field. 5 System Manager assumes the volume folder will be the same as the previous folder. To change the folder in which these volumes will be created: a Click the expand button next to the New Volume Folder field. b Select a new volume folder. c Click Continue. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups page reappears. 6 System Manager assumes the new volumes will be mapped to the same server as the current volumes. To change the server to which these volumes will be mapped: a Click the expand button next to the Select a Server field. b Select a new server. c Click Continue. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups page reappears. 7 Click Create Now. The new volumes appear in the System Tree.

Dell Compellent

81

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

82

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles

User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show Replay information.

Replay Profile General Tab When you select a specific Replay Profile, System Manager displays the General tab.

Field

Description

Name

Name of the profile, either as assigned by the system or by the person creating the profile.

Index

Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with object identification.

Type

A Replay Profile can be on of the following: Standard: Predefined by System Manager. Custom: Created by a user.

Replay Creation

A Replay applied to more than one volume can be one of the following: Serial: Takes a Replay one volume at a time. Parallel: Creates a Replay of all volumes simultaneously.

Consistent

Halts IO to all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached until Replays are taken for each volume.

Schedule

Specifies when Replays will be taken.

Expiration

How long the Replay will be saved. Replays can also be manually expired.

See Also Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes on page 60 Creating Replay Profiles on page 62 Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly on page 74

Dell Compellent

83

Chapter 3 Replay Profiles

Replay Profile Volumes Tab The Volumes tab in the Replay Profile window lists all volumes currently using the selected Replay.

Field

Description

Name

Name of the volume.

Volume Type

A Volume Type may be one of the following: •

Dynamic Write: A volume for which no Replays have been taken (see page 48).

•

Replay Enabled: A volume that has at least one Replay (see page 48).

Storage Type

The standard storage type is Redundant - 2 MB.

Disk Folder

Name of the disk folder associated with the volume.

Consumed Disk Space

Amount of space used for the replay.

Logical Size

Logical size of the volume.

See Also Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes on page 60 Creating Replay Profiles on page 62 Change Profiles Attached to a Volume on page 71 Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile on page 72

84

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

4

Import Thin Import is used to copy data from remote disks to Storage Center, or to migrate and mirror data between Storage Center and a remote disk. To use the Import options, you must create External Device objects in the Disk node of the System Tree, and create a QoS definition. Note: Data replication between Storage Centers is managed using Enterprise Manager.

Contents Setting up an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Mapping an External Device to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Importing from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Creating and Editing a QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 User Interface Reference for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Dell Compellent

85

Chapter 4 Import

Setting up an External Device To import data to a Storage Center you must have the required amount of disk space classified as an External Device, which can only be done if the disk is unmanaged. 1 In the System Tree, select an unmanaged disk.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Classify Disk as External Device. The Classify Disk as External Device dialog box appears.

3 Enter a name. You may choose to name this disk to indicate from where the data was imported.

86

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Setting up an External Device

4 Click Classify Now. Upon completion, external devices can be found in the External Devices folder under the Disks node in System Explorer view.

See Also Release a Managed Disk on page 200

Dell Compellent

87

Chapter 4 Import

Mapping an External Device to a Server Map the external device to a server to allow the server to see the external device. Note: If you map an external device to a server that does not have a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) available, the server will not detect the external device. When an HBA is added, the mapped external device will appear at the server. 1 In the System Tree, right-click on an unmapped external device and select Map External Device to Server from the menu. The Map External Device to Server wizard starts.

2 Select a server in the list, or if necessary, create a server or cluster. 3 Click Continue. The QoS definition page appears.

4 Select the QoS Definition to use or create a new definition. 5 Click Continue. A summary page appears.

88

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Mapping an External Device to a Server

6 Click Map Device Now. 7 To view the mapping details, select the external device in the System Tree, and click the Mapping tab in the main window.

See Also Create a Server on page 110 Create a Server Cluster on page 115 Create a New QoS Definition on page 95

Dell Compellent

89

Chapter 4 Import

Importing from an External Device When you import data, Storage Center uses thin provisioning to migrate data to the specified volume. The import process can be monitored using the System Manager View menu or on the Volume properties Import tab until the import is entirely synchronized. Note: Mappings between the source volume and the original server should be removed before starting a Thin Import. 1 Right-click on an External Device and select Thin Import from External Device from the shortcut menu. The Thin Import from External Device wizard starts.

2 Select the type of Thin Import to perform: •

Copy: Copies data from the source device to the destination volume. Changes made to the source during the copy process are copied to the destination volume. Copy does not dynamically update the destination volume after the copy is complete.

•

Copy/Migrate: Copies data from the source device to the destination volume. When complete, the copied data resides on the destination volume, and the destination volume is mapped to the Storage Center server.

A Warning screen may appear, cautioning you about the space the import process will occupy.

90

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Importing from an External Device

3 Click Continue. The next page displays a list of volumes.

4 In the Volume list, select an existing volume or click Create Volume to create a new volume. Follow the Create Volume wizard and return to this step. 5 Click Continue. The QoS Definition page appears.

Dell Compellent

91

Chapter 4 Import

6 Select the QoS definition for the import process or click Create QoS Definition if the required definition does not exist. Follow the Create QoS wizard and return to this step. 7 Click Continue. The final page displays all the selected information for verification.

8 Click Import Now to start the process. During the Import, information about the process is shown in the Volume Import tab and in the View→ Import tab. Note: Importing data from an external device requires the Storage Center to read all blocks of the entire size of the volume. Depending on RAID selection this may consume up to two times the storage of the volume on your Storage Center. Thin import works by not writing data if no previous page exists for the data in question, and the data being written is all zeros. This saves significant space for many sparse data sets.

92

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Importing from an External Device

Dell Compellent

93

Chapter 4 Import

9 After the Import, System Manager proceeds in different ways depending on whether the Import was a Copy or a Copy–Migrate. •

Copy: The Import tab is removed from the Volume properties and the record is removed from the View→ Import window.

•

Copy–Migrate: the Import tab remains on the Volume properties page, and the import Type on the View→ Import window changes to Mirror to External Device.

10 If data was copied to Storage Center, you can reallocate the disk space by deleting the External Devices node. 11 If data was migrated to Storage Center, the data is mirrored back to its source. You can leave it in this state, or if you do not need to retain the connection to the source, delete the record from the View→ Import window and reallocate the disks in the External Devices node. See Also Create a Volume on page 17 Create a New QoS Definition on page 95

94

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating and Editing a QoS Definition

Creating and Editing a QoS Definition Importing data requires a Quality of Service (QoS) definition to specify a link speed and the amount of bandwidth that replications are allowed to use for the data import.

Create a New QoS Definition The Create Replication QoS Definition wizard steps you through the process for defining a QoS definition. QoS definitions you create here are displayed as QoS options in the wizard and also on the properties tab of existing replications. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Remote Systems node. 2 Right click on QoS Definitions and select Create QoS Definition. The Create Replication QoS Definition wizard starts.

3 In the first page of the wizard, select the Link Speed that most closely represents your link or select Other to enter the appropriate link speed. This setting defines link attributes only. 4 Set the Number of Links. If you have more than one link to the remote Storage Center, enter that number. This adjusts the maximum bandwidth allowed without changing the communication link settings. This setting distributes link resources. 5 Click Continue. The System Manager asks if you want to perform bandwidth limiting. Bandwidth limiting incurs additional system overhead and is inherently less bandwidth efficient. Use bandwidth limiting only in cases where the link is shared with other traffic. 6 For replications to use all bandwidth on the link at all times, click No. If you click No, skip the remainder of this step. a To create a bandwidth limit schedule, click Yes. b Click and drag the mouse pointer down and to the right to select days and hours. c Select a percentage bandwidth limit. The percentage and hours bandwidth will be limited are displayed. 7 Click Continue. 8 Enter a Name for the QoS Definition, and (optionally) notes that describe the definition. 9 Click Create Now. The QoS is created.

Dell Compellent

95

Chapter 4 Import

See Also Set Advanced Options on page 97

Edit QoS Definition Properties Use the QoS Properties to change settings in the QoS definition. 1 In the System Tree, select a QoS definition. 2 From the QoS shortcut menu, select Properties. The QoS Definition Properties dialog box appears.

3 On the General tab, change any of the following: QoS name, Type (QoS definition), Link Speed, Number of Links. 4 (Optional) Click Advanced to change Advanced Chopper Settings. Note: Advanced Chopper Settings should modified only under the guidance of Dell Technical Support Services. See the table on page 103 for descriptions of these settings. 5 (Optional) Click the Notes tab to change or add QoS properties notes.

96

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating and Editing a QoS Definition

Set Advanced Options Use Advanced Chopper Settings to adjust IO parameters for specific requirements as recommended by Dell Technical Support Services. 1 Display the Advanced Chopper Settings for a QoS Definition: •

Right-click on an existing QoS definition and select Properties, then click the Advanced tab:

•

Create a new QoS definition, and in the first page of Create Replication QoS Definition wizard. Note: Advanced Chopper Settings should be modified only under the guidance of Dell Technical Support Services.

2 Adjust the values as recommended by Dell Technical Support Services. 3 Save the new settings: •

If you are editing an existing definition, click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.

•

If you are creating a new QoS definition, click Continue to proceed to the next page in the wizard.

See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab on page 103

Dell Compellent

97

Chapter 4 Import

User Interface Reference for QoS This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show or modify QoS information.

QoS General Tab Selecting a QoS in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across the top. Each tab provides information about the volume. The QoS General tab provides an overview of the selected QoS.

Setting

Description

Name

Name of the QoS definition.

Link Speed

Speed of the QoS link.

IOs Per Second

Number of IO requests completed per second.

KBs Per Second

Amount of data transported per second.

Date Created / Date Updated Date of creation/update and by whom. Notes

Optional notes about the volume.

See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96

98

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for QoS

QoS Limit Tab The QoS Limit tab displays the bandwidth limit percent and the time in hours that the limit is in place.

See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96

Dell Compellent

99

Chapter 4 Import

QoS Advanced Tab The QoS Advanced Tab displays the current Advanced Chopper Settings.

Setting

Description

Global Maximum Sectors Per IO

Number of sectors to transfer in a single I/O request.

Global Maximum Number of IOs

Total number of outstanding I/O requests allowed.

Global Maximum Number of Sectors

Total number of outstanding sectors allowed.

Destination Maximum Number of IOs

Number of outstanding I/Os allowed per destination.

Destination Maximum Number of Sectors

Number of outstanding sectors allowed per destination.

Maximum IOs Per Queue Pass

Number of I/Os allowed at each pass through the system queue.

Maximum Sectors Per Queue Pass

Number of sectors allowed to a destination at each pass through the system queue.

See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab on page 103

100

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for QoS

QoS Definition Replications Tab The Replications tab lists replications that use the selected QoS definition.

Dell Compellent

Field

Description

Replication Name

Name of the replication

Source Volume

Name of the source volume for the replication

Replication State

Up or Down

Remote System

Storage Center to which the replication was made

Percentage Synced

Status of the Asynchronous replication as a percentage

Remaining

Amount of data remaining to be synched

Current Replay

Date and time of current Replay being replicated (or active Replay)

Replicate Active Replay

Whether the active Replay is being replicated

Deduplication

Whether Deduplication is active

Using Live Volume

Whether the replication is using Live Volume

QoS Definition

Name of QoS definition used by the replication

101

Chapter 4 Import

QoS Definition Properties General Tab The General Properties tab allows you to view and edit QoS Definition properties.

Setting

Description

Name

Name of the QoS definition

Type

QoS Definition

Link Speed

Speed of the QoS link.

Number of Links

Number of links to the remote Storage Center.

See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96

102

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for QoS

QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab The QoS Properties Advanced Tab allows you to adjust the Advanced Chopper Settings.

Dell Compellent

Setting

Description

Global Maximum Sectors Per IO

Number of sectors to transfer in a single I/O request. This number determines the maximum size of an I/O request. Larger values cause less data "chopping" and larger “chunks” of data will be sent on the wire. If this value is set too high, the target side's write cache may be bypassed.

Global Maximum Number of IOs

Total number of outstanding I/O requests allowed. This setting is related to the execution throttle set in the HBA. The iSCSI protocol limits the number of outstanding requests to 64, so setting this value any higher will have no effect on iSCSI transports.

Global Maximum Number of Sectors

Total number of outstanding sectors allowed. This setting determines the total amount of data on the wire at any given time; if sectors per I/O multiplied by the number of I/Os is greater than this value, outstanding I/Os are limited.

Destination Maximum Number of IOs

Number of outstanding I/Os allowed per destination.

103

Chapter 4 Import

Setting

Description

Destination Maximum Number of Sectors

Number of outstanding sectors allowed per destination.

Maximum IOs Per Queue Pass

Number of I/Os allowed at each pass through the system queue. This setting is relevant on a per destination basis. If there are multiple volumes to a single destination, outstanding I/Os are serviced from the first volume, then the second, and so on, until this number is reached. Smaller values ensure that all volumes to a destination get serviced often.

Maximum Sectors Per Queue Pass

Number of sectors allowed to a destination at each pass through the system queue. Smaller values increase fairness at the expense of CPU utilization.

See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96

QoS Definition Properties Notes Tab The QoS Properties Notes Tab allows you to add notes about the QoS Definition.

See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96

104

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

5

Servers This chapter describes how to connect and manage servers in Storage Center.

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Managing Single Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Managing Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Managing Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Managing Server Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Managing HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Using Topology Explorer Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 User Interface Reference for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Dell Compellent

105

Chapter 5 Servers

Introduction Defining a server enables Storage Center to pass IO through the ports on that server. After a server is created, volumes can be mapped to it. Several servers can be combined into a server cluster. The Storage Center views the server cluster as one server. Volumes can be mapped to the server cluster or to a server that is a member of the cluster. One server or server cluster can be the host of one or more virtual servers. Each virtual server can have a different operating system. The Storage Center views each virtual server as a separate entity. Volumes mapped to one virtual server are not mapped to other virtual servers residing on the same server. Servers can be organized into server folders either to make them easier to manage or as a means to restrict access to servers. See Also Managing Server Clusters on page 115 Create a Virtual Server on page 124 Users and User Groups on page 297

Restrictions for Servers Created by FluidFS Servers and server clusters created using the FluidFS file system cannot be modified or deleted using Storage Center System Manager. Therefore, for these server types: •

Shortcut menus customarily displayed when right-clicking on a server or server cluster are disabled.

•

Context menu commands customarily displayed near the top of the System Explorer window are disabled.

For information about managing FluidFS servers and server clusters, see your FluidFS product documentation. See Also Shortcut Menu on page 7

Server Icons In the System Tree, the System Manager uses icons to denote the server type. Icon

Server Type Server Node — all servers

Server Folder

FluidFS Server

Server

106

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Server Mapping

Icon

Server Type Server Cluster

FluidFS Server Cluster

Virtual Server

Server Mapping Server mapping details are shown in the main window by selecting a server in the System Tree and clicking the Mapping tab.

Information displayed depends on the server configuration, such as:

Dell Compellent

•

Server with HBA ports of different transport types (such as Fibre Channel and iSCSI)

•

Server with multiple server HBA ports

•

Clustered server

•

Virtual server

•

Server whose operating system supports multi-pathing

107

Chapter 5 Servers

View Server Mapping The server Mapping tab shows the mapping between volumes and servers. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 Click the Mapping tab. Mapping information appears. The Mapping tab shows the volumes to which the server is mapped and a mapping grid that shows additional Mapping Details about the manner in which the volume is mapped to the server. •

Virtual Servers: If the server selected is a virtual server, the Mapping tab displays which volumes are mapped to the virtual server. Information includes whether the volume is mapped to the virtual server, the host server of the virtual server, or mapped to both.

•

Advanced Mapping Details: You can view advanced mapping details only if your user volume default settings permit you to do so.

See Also Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324.

View Volumes Mapped to a Server Use the Volumes tab to see a list of volumes that are connected to a specific server. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. Server information appears. 2 Click the Volumes tab. System Manager displays the volumes that are mapped to this server, including volume name, type of volume, whether the volume is redundant, the amount of disk space consumed by the volume, and the logical size of the volume.

View Details about Volumes Mapped to a Server Use the Mapping tab to display details about volumes that are mapped to the server, server cluster, or virtual server. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. Server information appears. 2 Click the Mapping tab. Select a volume to view details about the way that volume is mapped to the server or server cluster, including cluster node information.

108

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Server Mapping

View Volumes Mapped to a Remote System Use the Mapping tab to display details about volumes that are mapped to a remote system. If the server selected is a remote system, the Mapping displays the volumes that are mapped to that remote system. Select a volume to view details about the way that volume is mapped to the remote system.

View Server Charts Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 Click on the Charts tab.

Dell Compellent

•

The top of the chart displays reads, writes, and total KB per second

•

The bottom of the chart displays reads, writes, and total IO per second

109

Chapter 5 Servers

Managing Single Servers Creating a server means to identify it to a Storage Center using the Create Server wizard. If you are using iSCSI CHAP, add remote CHAP initiators to communicate with the server, see Add a Remote CHAP Initiator on page 174.

Create a Server The Create Server wizard guides you through the process of creating a server. 1 In the System Tree, select Servers. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server. The Create Server wizard starts. The wizard lists Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) recognized by the Storage Center.

110

•

Check boxes near the bottom of the page allow you to filter HBA connections displayed on this page.

•

Buttons at the bottom of the page allow you to select from various actions:

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Single Servers

Button

Actions

Define HBA by IP

This page of the wizard allows you to manually define an HBA port that has not yet been connected to a Storage Center. 1

Enter the static IP address of the HBA port.

2

Click Continue.

The HBA is added to the list of available HBAs. Manually Define HBA

Find HBA

This page of the wizard allows you to manually define an HBA port that has not yet been connected to a Storage Center. 1

Select the transport type (Fibre Chanel or iSCSI).

2

Enter a WWN or iSCSI name for the HBA.

3

Click Continue.

Find HBA helps you find the servers currently on the network or servers to be added to the network. If your server is already connected to the network click Yes, if not, click No. •

If Yes, unplug your server from the network, wait 30 seconds, and click Continue.

•

If No, plug your server into the network, wait 30 seconds, and click Continue.

•

If new HBAs are not detected, check the connection between the server and the controller, and click Scan Again. If new HBAs are still not detected, there is a problem with your network, HBAs, or fiber cables.

If new HBAs are detected, the screen will display the message "# Host Bus Adapters have been detected” (where # is a number).

3 Select one or more HBAs. If you select an iSCSI HBA, you have the option to create the server using WWNs or iSCSI Qualified Names (IQNs) for HBAs. Default is iSCSI Name. 4 Click Continue. A page allowing you to name the server appears.

5 Enter a name for the server or accept the default. 6 Enter a folder name.

Dell Compellent

111

Chapter 5 Servers

7 (Optional) Add notes. 8 From the drop-down menu, select an operating system (OS) for the server. All servers must have an OS defined. Expand operating system folders to view operating system versions. Note: Volumes are mapped to servers according to the rules of the server operating system. 9 Click Continue. The page displays the name and attributes of the server. Click the question mark icon. A page is displayed showing rules for the selected operating system.

10 Click Create Now. On the next page, select from the following options: •

Map the server to a Volume

•

Map a different Server to a Volume

•

Create Volume

•

Create Server

11 Click Close to exit the wizard Note: For a short time after a server is created, it may appear in the System Tree with an error icon while Storage Center re-evaluates its server connectivity. When System Manager is refreshed, the error icon disappears when the server is visible to Storage Center.

112

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Single Servers

Rename a Server Use the Server Properties dialog box to change a server name. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Server Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. This tab shows the server name and operating system.

3 Enter a new name. 4 (Optional) Enter notes on the Info tab. 5 Click OK. The server is renamed.

Change the Operating System of a Server If an operating system on a server changes because of an operating system upgrade or operating system capability changes from single path to multi-path, you may need to change the operating system of the server in Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Server Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Select a new operating system. 4 (Optional) Enter notes on the Info tab. 5 Click OK. The operating system of that server is changed.

Dell Compellent

113

Chapter 5 Servers

Remove Mappings from a Server You can either select a volume and remove the mapping to the server, or select a server and remove volumes mapped to it. This command is similar for servers, server clusters, and virtual servers. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove Mappings from a Server. System Manager displays volumes mapped to that server. 3 Select mappings to remove. •

Make sure that the volume mapped to this server is no longer mounted. If you remove an active map entry, the server using the volume will have read/write errors. System Manager warns you if you are attempting to remove an active map entry.

•

Make sure that removing this mapping will not create a gap in the LUN sequence. Most operating systems require contiguous LUN sequencing starting with LUN 0. A gap in the LUN sequence may cause the server to fail to recognize subsequent volumes.

4 Click Remove Now. The mapping is removed.

Delete a Server Deleting a server returns HBAs connected to that server to the list of available HBAs. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. 3 Click Yes. The server is deleted. When deleting a server, be aware of the following:

114

•

Deleting a server cluster deletes all the servers within the cluster.

•

Deleting a server node within a server cluster deletes only that server node.

•

Deleting a server that is part of a virtual server deletes only that server.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Server Clusters

Managing Server Clusters A server cluster is a collection of servers. A server that is a member of a server cluster is referred to as a cluster node. Volumes can be mapped directly to a server cluster. All volumes mapped to a server cluster are automatically mapped to all nodes in the cluster. This increases IO efficiency and, if one server fails, IO continues to other servers within the cluster. Volumes can also be mapped to only one of the nodes within the server cluster. Some operating systems require that a volume mapped to multiple cluster nodes use the same LUN on each node. When creating a server cluster, Storage Center attempts to map an included volume to the same LUN on all cluster servers. If the LUN selected is not available on a particular server, the mapping is not performed and the volume is only partially connected to the cluster. All servers within a server cluster must have the same operating system.

Create a Server Cluster Use the Create Server Cluster wizard to create a server cluster. 1 In the System Tree, select Servers. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server Cluster. The Create Server Cluster wizard starts.

3 Click Add Existing Server. The Select a Server page appears.

Dell Compellent

115

Chapter 5 Servers

4 Expand a server folder to view servers within the folder, if necessary, and select a server. 5 Click Continue. The original Create Server Cluster page reappears.

6 Add another server by clicking Add Existing Server again. The Create Server Cluster page reappears with the servers listed under Selected Servers. The page also displays the operating systems of the selected servers. Note: All servers in the server cluster must have the same operating system. If a server is incorrectly selected to be in a cluster, click Remove Selected Server to remove the server from the list before creating the server cluster. 7 After you have added all the servers to the server cluster, click Continue. A page opens that allows you to name the server cluster. 8 Name the server cluster or accept the default. 9 (Optional) Add notes.

116

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Server Clusters

10 Click Continue. If volumes were mapped to individual server nodes, System Manager displays a list of mapped volumes and asks you to select volumes to map to server cluster. By default, System Manager selects all volumes mapped to the server nodes, except boot volumes; by default, boot volumes are not selected to be mapped to the server cluster.

11 Click Continue. System Manager displays volumes mapped to cluster nodes and asks you to select the volumes you want to map to the cluster.

12 Click Continue. The system asks you to confirm. 13 From the next page, map volumes or click Close. Notice that the server cluster appears in the System Tree.

Dell Compellent

117

Chapter 5 Servers

14 In the Name field, enter a name or accept the default. 15 (Optional) Add notes. 16 Click Continue. System Manager displays a new page showing your server cluster creation choices. 17 Click Create Now to create the cluster or click Back to make changes.

Create a New Server for a Server Cluster If a server to be added to the cluster does not exist in Storage Center, you can create it from within the Create Server Cluster wizard. 1 In the System Tree, select Servers. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server Cluster. The Create Server Cluster wizard starts. 3 Click Create New Server and follow the Create Server wizard. When finished, you will return the Create Server Cluster wizard. 4 Finish the Create Server Cluster wizard. See Also Create a Server on page 110 Create a Server Cluster on page 115

Add a Server to Cluster Use the Add Server to Cluster wizard to add one server or multiple servers to a server cluster. 1 In the System Tree, select a server that is a not a member of a server cluster. From the shortcut menu, select Add Server to Cluster. The Add Server to Cluster wizard starts showing a list of server clusters. 2 Select a server cluster. 3 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Apply Now. Volumes that were mapped to the server cluster are now mapped to the server that was added.

118

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Server Clusters

Remove a Server from Cluster Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to remove one server or multiple servers from a server cluster.

Remove a Single Server Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to delete a server from a cluster. 1 In the System Tree, select a server that is a member of a server cluster. From the shortcut menu, select Remove Servers from Cluster. The Remove Servers from Cluster wizard starts. 2 Click Remove Now. Because volumes mapped to the server cluster are mapped to all servers within the cluster, removing a server from a cluster does not affect volumes mapped to the cluster.

Remove Multiple Servers Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to delete multiple servers from a cluster. 1 In the System Tree, select a server cluster. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove Servers from Cluster. System Manager displays a list of servers that are members of this cluster. 3 Select one or more servers to remove. Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Remove Now.

Dell Compellent

119

Chapter 5 Servers

Convert a Server to a Server Cluster In Server Clusters created using Storage Center software versions prior to version 5.5, a server cluster may have been represented by a single server definition containing the server ports for all nodes in the cluster. In the current version you can define each physical cluster node individually and then group them into a server cluster. You can then easily map volumes directly to the cluster to make them visible to each cluster node. The Convert to Server Cluster wizard guides you through the process of splitting an existing single server cluster definition into its individual cluster nodes. After cluster nodes are defined, volume maps will be moved automatically to each node without disrupting server IO. 1 In the System Tree, select a single server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Convert to Server Cluster. The Convert to Server Cluster wizard starts. Note: If the selected server is already a member of a server cluster, the Convert to Server Cluster option is not displayed. 3 Click Continue. A list of available server ports and defined cluster nodes is displayed. 4 Click Add Cluster Node to add an additional node to the cluster and select the server ports for that cluster node. After all available ports have been assigned to a cluster node, you will be able to proceed with server cluster creation. 5 Enter a name for the cluster node and select all server HBA ports that belong to the cluster node. 6 Click Add Cluster Node. After all available ports have been assigned to a cluster node, the wizard displays information about the cluster nodes to be created and the server HBA ports for each node. 7 Click Convert Now to complete server cluster creation.

120

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Server Clusters

Promote Server Cluster Mappings After a volume has been mapped to a server node, it can be promoted from that server node to a server cluster. 1 In the System Tree, select a server cluster. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Promote Mappings to Server Cluster. The Promote Mappings to Cluster wizard starts.

3 Select the mapping to promote by highlighting it. 4 Click Continue. The resulting page displays the volume selected for promotion and the name of the server cluster to which it will be mapped.

5 Click Promote Now to promote volume mappings or click Cancel to exit.

Dell Compellent

121

Chapter 5 Servers

Demote Server Cluster Mappings After a volume has been mapped to a server cluster, it can be demoted from that server cluster to a server node. 1 In the System Tree, select a server cluster. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Demote Mappings to Server Cluster Nodes. The Demote Mappings to Cluster Nodes wizard starts showing current mappings.

3 Select the check boxes of the mappings to be demoted. 4 Click Continue. The next page lists servers in the cluster and the volumes that are mapped to the servers.

•

Selected server mappings will be demoted from the cluster to the server. By default, all server mappings are selected.

•

Cleared server mappings will be deleted from the server.

5 Click Demote Now to demote volume mappings or click Cancel to exit.

122

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Server Clusters

Delete a Server Cluster Before you can delete a server cluster, you must remove or delete all the server nodes within the server cluster. 1 Make sure all nodes that were part of the cluster are removed or deleted. In the System Tree, select an empty server cluster. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. 3 Click Yes to confirm.

Dell Compellent

123

Chapter 5 Servers

Managing Virtual Servers You can create a new server as a virtual server or you can convert a physical server to a virtual server.

Create a Virtual Server Use the Create Virtual Server wizard to select all server HBAs for the new server. There is no limit on the number of virtual servers you can create on a server. 1 In the System Tree, select a server.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Virtual Server. A list of available HBAs appears. 3 If you know the HBA(s) for the selected server, select it by clicking the check box to the left of the HBA(s) name. If not, select either Manually Define HBA or Find HBA and follow the instructions. 4 After you have selected or defined the HBA(s), click Continue. A page allowing you to name virtual server appears. 5 Enter a name or accept the default. 6 From the drop-down menu, select an operating system that can act as an OS for a virtual machine, such as Windows 2008. 7 (Optional) Add notes. 8 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 9 Click Create Now. The virtual server appears under the host server you selected.

124

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Virtual Servers

Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server Use the Create Virtual Server wizard to convert a physical server to a virtual server. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Convert to Virtual Server. System Manager asks you to select a host server or server cluster for the selected servers. Note: The destination server or server cluster must be running an operating system that can act as a virtual server host, such as VMWare ESX or Windows 2008. 3 In the System Tree, select a server or server cluster. Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 4 Click Convert Now. The clustered server is converted to a virtual server.

Dell Compellent

125

Chapter 5 Servers

Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server Use the Convert to Physical Server wizard to convert a virtual server to a physical server. 1 In the System Tree, select a virtual server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Convert to Physical Server. The Convert Virtual Server to Physical Server wizard starts.

3 Click Convert Now. The other virtual servers remain virtual. Only the server you converted to a physical server is removed from the virtual server group.

Delete a Virtual Host Server Follow these step to delete a virtual host server. 1 In the System Tree, select a virtual host server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager warns you that deleting a virtual host server also deletes all virtual servers attached to the host. 3 Click Yes. The virtual host server and all virtual servers attached to the host are deleted.

126

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Server Folders

Managing Server Folders Use server folders to organize and to control access to servers. Server folders can be hierarchical. Folders appear in the System Tree under the servers node.

Create a Server Folder Use the Create Server Folder wizard to create folders. 1 In the System Tree, select Servers. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Server Folder. The Create Server Folder wizard starts. 3 Enter a name or accept the default. 4 (Optional) Enter notes. 5 Click Create Now.

Add Servers to a Server Folder Use the shortcut menu options to move servers to a folder. 1 In the System Tree, select one or more servers.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Move to Folder. System Manager displays a list of folders. 3 Select a folder. 4 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 5 Click Move Now.

Move Servers to a Different Folder Use the shortcut menu options to move servers from one folder to another folder. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. From the shortcut menu, select Move to Folder. The Move Servers wizard starts, displaying server folders. 2 Select a folder to which to move the server. 3 Click Continue. System Manager displays the server and the folder path. 4 Click Move Now.

Dell Compellent

127

Chapter 5 Servers

Managing HBAs Use these tasks to locate, add, and delete HBAs in the Storage Center.

Find an HBA The find HBA option requires physical access to the server ports. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. From the shortcut menu, select Add HBAs to Server. The Add HBAs to Server wizard starts. 2 Click Find HBA. System Manager asks if the server is already cabled to the network. •

•

If you click Yes, System Manager asks you to make sure that the network acknowledges the HBA. •

Locate and unplug the cable to the HBA on the back of the server.

•

Wait 60 seconds.

•

Plug the cable going to the HBA back into the server.

•

Click Find HBA again.

•

Select an HBA. Click Continue. The system asks you to confirm.

If you click No: •

Plug the server into the FC Network or create a connection by logging on to the iSCSI portal.

•

Wait 30 seconds

•

Click Continue. Note: If Storage Center does not recognize the new HBA, check the cabling and connections and click Scan Again.

128

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing HBAs

Add HBAs to a Server from a List If you add a new card to a server, you can logically identify it to the Storage Center using the Add HBAs to Server wizard. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Add HBAs to Server. The Add HBAs to Server wizard starts. In the Connected Controller Ports column, System Manager lists the server ports connected to this controller.

3 Select the HBAs you want to display: FC, iSCSI, or only Up connections. Note: When you click Refresh, System Manager does not scan for new HBAs; it merely re-displays the current list of HBAs. 4 Select an HBA. Note: If you select an iSCSI HBA, you have the option to create the server using WWNs or iSCSI Qualified Names (IQNs) for HBAs. Default is iSCSI Qualified Name. 5 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 6 Click Modify Now.

Dell Compellent

129

Chapter 5 Servers

Manually Define an HBA Use the Add HBA to Server wizard to define an HBA that does not appear in the list. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. From the shortcut menu, select Add HBAs to Server. 2 In the Add HBA to Server wizard, click Manually Define HBA. The Add HBAs to Server page appears. 3 Select a Transport Type and enter a World Wide Name or iSCSI name for the HBA.

4 Click Continue. The HBA you entered is shown in the list of HBAs. 5 Select the HBA you defined. 6 Click Continue. A summary page appears. 7 Click Modify Now. The HBA is added to the server.

130

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing HBAs

Remove HBAs from a Server Before removing an HBA, make sure that no volumes are mounted to this server through this HBA. If you remove an active HBA, the server that is using the volume no longer has access to that volume and will receive read or write errors. When you map a volume to a server, you are really mapping that volume to one (or possibly more than one) of the server HBAs. When you remove an HBA to which a volume is mapped, the maps are also deleted. Note: When an HBA is removed from a server, any mapping through those HBA ports will be automatically reevaluated and moved to other HBA ports on the server if any are available. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Remove HBAs from Server. System Manager displays the HBAs on that server. 3 Select an HBA. 4 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 5 Click Remove HBAs Now. The HBA is removed.

Delete an HBA Follow these steps to delete an HBA from the System Tree. 1 In the System Tree, select a server. 2 Click the Server HBAs tab. 3 Right-click on a server port and select Remove HBA. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Remove HBA Now.

Dell Compellent

131

Chapter 5 Servers

View a Server Connectivity Report The Server Connectivity report, available in the View menu, shows server port information, including WWN and fault domain. Note: A Server Connectivity Report appears only if the Storage Center does not have Virtual Ports. 1 From the View menu, select Server Connectivity. The server connectivity information appears. The left side lists: •

WorldWide Name (WWN)

•

Name of server

•

Type of server

•

Port type of FC or iSCSI

2 Scroll to the right to view additional information for each server.

132

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using Topology Explorer Server Functions

Using Topology Explorer Server Functions Use Topology Explorer to map volumes to servers and external (remote) Storage Centers easily by dragging components. The Topology Explorer is divided into three columns. The left column displays servers. The middle column displays volumes, and the right column displays external (remote) Storage Centers. From the View menu, select Topology Explorer.

•

The Connections button, located above the right column, toggles between showing all connections and showing connections only for selected objects. Numbers that appear on the connection lines between servers and volumes indicate the logical unit for the mapping. If there are Replications, there will also be connection lines between volumes and the remote volumes to which they are Replicating.

•

The Folders button, located to the right of the Connections button, toggles between showing and hiding volume folders. When the Folders button is toggled to show folders, a red line is drawn through the Folders button and unmapped folders are displayed. When the Topology Explorer displays folders, two additional command objects appear at the bottom of the window: Create New Server Folder and Create New Volume Folder.

The following two server functions are available through Topology Explorer command objects: •

Create New Server object starts the Create Server wizard.

•

Create New Server Folder starts the Create Server Folder wizard.

See Also Using the Topology Explorer on page 45

Dell Compellent

133

Chapter 5 Servers

Create a New Server with the Topology Explorer Use the mouse to drag and drop a server into a Storage Center network. 1 Drag the New Server command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create Server wizard starts. 2 Follow the instructions described on Managing Single Servers on page 110.

Create a New Server Folder with the Topology Explorer Use the mouse to drag and drop a server folder 1 Make sure the Show Folders toggle is enabled and the Show Folder command object appears. 2 Drag the New Server Folder command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create New Server Folder wizard starts. 3 Follow the instructions described in Create a Server Folder on page 127.

134

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Servers

User Interface Reference for Servers This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show server information.

Server Information General Tab System Manager displays general and detailed information about each server connected to Storage Center in the General tab.

Field

Description

Name

Name of server, applied when server was created.

Index

Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with object identification.

Folder

If the server is organized into a folder, the folder in which it resides.

Type

Server, virtual server, or server cluster.

Operating System

Operating system of the server.

Connectivity

Connection status of the server.

Date

Date server was created/updated and by whom.

Notes

Optional notes, frequently blank.

See Also Rename a Server on page 113

Dell Compellent

135

Chapter 5 Servers

Server HBAs Tab The Server HBA tab displays information about the HBAs used to communicate between the server and the Storage Center.

Field

Description

Type

May be FC or iSCSI.

Server Port

IQN or WWN for iSCSI and WWN for FC.

Status

Status of the server port.

Connectivity

Connection status of the server port.

Port Information

Port ID, node name, and other identifying information.

Connected Controller Ports

Address of connected controller ports.

See Also Find an HBA on page 128 Add HBAs to a Server from a List on page 129 Manually Define an HBA on page 130 Remove HBAs from a Server on page 131 Delete an HBA on page 131

136

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Servers

Server Connectivity Tab The server Connectivity tab displays information about individual HBAs connected to the Storage Center across controller ports and fault domains.

Note: The preceding figure shows sample connectivity information for Fibre Channel. For iSCSI, this pane also displays the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. The upper portion of the pane shows information about the Server HBA. Field

Description

Controller Port

IQN or WWN for iSCSI and WWN for FC.

Status

Status of the server port.

Controller

Controller name associated with the port.

Type

Virtual Port or Physical port.

See Also Find an HBA on page 128 Add HBAs to a Server from a List on page 129 Remove HBAs from a Server on page 131

Dell Compellent

137

Chapter 5 Servers

Server Mapping Tab The server Mapping tab lists the volumes to which it is mapped and shows the mapping details.

Information displayed depends on the server configuration, but typically covers these fields. Field

Description

Volume

Name of the volume to which the server is mapped.

Status

Indicates whether the link is Up or Down.

Type

Transport type: FC or iSCSI.

Server

Name of the server to which the volume is mapped.

Server Port

WWN of the server port to which the volume is mapped.

Controller Port

WWN of the controller port to which the volume is mapped.

LUN

Logical unit number assigned (if applicable).

Read Only

Indicates whether the advanced option is set to make the volume Read Only.

See Also Map a Volume to a Server on page 24 Map a Volume to Remote System on page 26 Remove Mappings from a Server on page 114

138

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Servers

Server Volumes Tab The server Volumes tab shows information about the volumes mapped to the server.

Field

Description

Name

Name of the volume.

Volume Type

May be one of the following: •

Active: Volume for which no Replays have been taken.

•

Replay Enabled: Volume for which a Replay has been taken.

Storage Type

Default is 2 MB Redundant.

Disk Folder

Folder the volume uses for storage (if any).

Consumed Disk Space

Amount of disk space used.

Logical Size

Size of the volume.

Mapped Via

Mapping path.

See Also Map a Volume to a Server on page 24 View Volumes Mapped to a Server on page 108 Remove Mappings from a Server on page 114

Dell Compellent

139

Chapter 5 Servers

Server Charts Tab The server Charts tab displays Read and Write performance for the sever. The results are shown for the most current 1 hour period.

See Also View Server Charts on page 109

140

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

6

Controllers The Dell Compellent controller provides central processing for the Storage Center and also manages RAID storage. Storage Center can be configured with either single- or dualcontrollers with Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and SAS interconnects. Dual-controllers provide automatic failover.

Contents Setting Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Viewing Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 About Controller Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 About Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 About VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Viewing SAS Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Managing IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Rebalancing Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 User Interface Reference for Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Dell Compellent

141

Chapter 6 Controllers

Setting Controller Properties The Controller Properties dialog box displays information about a controller.

Change the Controller Name Use the Controller Properties General tab to change the controller name. 1 In the System Tree, select a controller. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Controller properties information appears with the General tab selected. 3 Enter the controller name in the

box.

4 Click OK to confirm any changes.

Set Controller IP Properties The Controller IP addresses for internal communications are established during system setup and rarely need to be changed. You may change the Management IP (Ether 0), and you must do so if you are using IPv6. Caution: Do not change any IPv4 properties in the Controller Properties dialog box without the guidance of a Dell Technical Support Services. Changing IP properties can result in the loss of data. 1 In the System Tree, select a controller. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Controller properties information appears. 3 Click the IP tab. 4 Change the Ether 0 (MGMT) Interface IP as needed. 5 If you are using IPv6 addresses, make sure to enter the IPv6 Prefix Length. 6 Click OK to confirm any changes.

Add Controller Notes The Controller Properties Info tab provide general controller information. 1 In the System Tree, select a controller. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Controller properties information appears. 3 Click the Info tab to view information about controller creation and updates. 4 (Optional) Add notes.

142

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Controller Status

Viewing Controller Status From the Controllers node on the System Tree you can view controller hardware status. 1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node. 2 From the list, select a component to display information about the component. •

Fans For each of the blowers in the fan module, displays fan status and current rpm. The rpm gauge displays fan zones. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. If it is not operating in green zone, adjust the ambient temperature. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum rpms, and upper and lower critical and warning rpms.

•

Power Supplies Displays the power supply name, if it is present, if there is a failure, and if the AC is lost.

•

Temps Displays temperature sensor properties including position of the sensor, status, and current temp. The temperature gauge displays temperature zones. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum temp, and upper and lower critical and warning temperatures.

•

Voltage Displays voltage properties including position of the sensor, status, and current voltage. The voltage gauge displays voltage zones. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum voltage, and upper and lower critical and warning voltage.

•

Cache Card Displays information about the card including the cache card model, cache size, firmware version, in service date, and status. Cache card information may be required by Dell Technical Support Services.

Dell Compellent

143

Chapter 6 Controllers

View Controller Information When you select the Controller node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of controllers in the Storage Center with basic information about each one. 1 In the System Tree, select Controllers. System Manager displays a list of controllers.

2 Click on a specific controller. System Manager displays information for the individual controller.

144

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Controller Status

View Controller Performance Information System Manager displays CPU and memory statistics for the most current one-hour period. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Controllers node. 2 Click on a specific controller. 3 In the main window, click the CPU Performance tab. System Manager displays CPU performance and memory usage as a percentage of total capability used.

View the Back of a Controller System Manager can display the back view of the controller, showing HBA, port, and power supply locations. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Controllers node. 2 Click on a specific controller. 3 In the main window, click the Back tab. 4 View more information and options using these methods: •

Hover the cursor over an object to view more information.

•

Right-click an object to display additional options. Note: IO port location varies by controller type.

Dell Compellent

145

Chapter 6 Controllers

About Controller Virtual Ports Virtual ports change IO ports from a physical to a virtualized representation. This eliminates the need to reserve ports in case of a failure. In a virtual environment all ports are primary and can read and write IO. If a port fails, any port within the fault domain takes over for the failed port. After enabled, virtual ports are displayed in the System Tree under the IO card to which they belong. 1 In the System Tree, expand the Controllers node. 2 Expand the node for a specific controller. 3 Expand the nodes for IO Cards→ Card Type→ Specific Card. 4 Select a specific port.

•

FC and iSCSI: System Manager displays a virtual port for each physical port. For physical ports, the physical identity, speed, and hardware are given. For virtual ports, the current and preferred physical port are shown.

•

iSCSI only: System Manager creates a control port for each iSCSI fault domain (usually there is only one). In a dual-controller configuration, the control port appears on only one controller, even though it controls all the iSCSI cards within that domain. Note: Although you can have more than one fault domain for each transport type (such as iSCSI or FC), redundancy is best achieved by creating one fault domain for each transport type.

146

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports

Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports System Manager provides IO card and port information such as type, location, and status. Use these tasks to view information about Fibre Channel cards and ports.

View FC Card Information When you select the FC node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of FC cards in the controller. When you select a specific IO card, System Manager displays details about the selected card. 1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node. 2 Click on FC. The window displays status and other information about each Fibre Channel IO Card installed in the controller.

3 Select a specific FC card. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO card.

Dell Compellent

Field

Description

Name

Name of IO card.

World Wide Name (WWN)

Unique identifier for the item.

Type

IO card type — may be FC or iSCSI.

Description

IO card vendor information.

Status

Status of port — may be Up, Down, or Reserved.

147

Chapter 6 Controllers

148

Field

Description

Speed

IO transport speed.

Fault Domain

For front-end ports, shows fault domain. For back-end ports, this is blank.

Purpose

Network connection — Front End, Back End, or Unknown.

Usage

Legacy ports only: For front-end ports, shows whether it is a primary or reserved port. If it is a back-end port, indicates if it is in use.

Preferred Controller

Legacy ports only: When ports are rebalanced, choose a preferred controller.

NPIV Mode

Indicates whether NPIV Mode is turned on to allow FC virtual ports. When converting an FC port to Virtual Mode, NPIV must be enabled on the attached switch.

Initiator Count

Number of front-end connections.

Target Count

Number of active disk drives in the Storage Center.

Both Count

Total of front-end devices and back-end disk drives.

Map Count

Number of mapped volumes.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports

View FC IO Port General Information System Manager displays port names, domains, and other information in the General tab of the main window. 1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. 2 Click on FC. 3 Expand a specific FC card. 4 Select a specific port on the FC card. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO port.

Dell Compellent

149

Chapter 6 Controllers

View FC IO Card Connectivity System Manager displays IO Card and port information such as WWN, slot and port locations, and node names. The Connectivity view is the same for FC cards with or without virtual ports enabled. 1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. 2 Expand the FC node. 3 Select a specific FC card. 4 Select the Connectivity tab. The window displays FC IO card connectivity information.

Set the Update Frequency for FC Card Status Use the options below the tabs to change how and when System Manager updates the view. 1 In the System Tree, select an FC card. 2 Click the Connectivity tab. 3 Click Set Update Frequency. 4 Choose one of the following: Off, 5 Seconds, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 5 Minutes.

150

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports

View FC IO Card Hardware Information Use the Hardware tab to view the card location within the controller. 1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. 2 Expand the FC node. 3 Select a specific FC card. 4 Click the Hardware tab. The FC IO card hardware status information appears.

Dell Compellent

•

The port location is identified.

•

Mousing over the card displays the name and type.

•

Right-clicking over the card displays the shortcut menu, from which you can view IO Card properties.

151

Chapter 6 Controllers

View FC IO Card Performance Charts Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. 1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. 2 Expand the FC node. 3 Select a specific FC card. 4 Click Charts. The FC IO Card charts appears.

For each FC IO card, System Manager displays:

152

•

KBs per second for Reads and Writes and Total KBs per second

•

IO rate per second for Reads and Writes and Total IO per second

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports

Set FC IO Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to change the User Alias name. 1 In the System Tree, select an FC card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears:

3 Enter a user alias (port name). 4 Click OK. The new name appears in the System Tree.

Reset IO Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to reset the User Alias name. 1 In the System Tree, select an FC card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click Reset User Alias. 4 Click OK.

Set NPIV Mode Use the Properties dialog box to change the NPIV mode. 1 In the System Tree, select an FC card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the Use NPIV Mode checkbox. This checkbox indicates whether NPIV Mode is turned on to allow FC virtual ports. When converting an FC port to Virtual Mode, NPIV must be enabled on the attached switch. 4 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

153

Chapter 6 Controllers

Change Preferred Physical Port Use the Properties dialog box to change the preferred physical port for the FC virtual port. 1 In the System Tree select a FC virtual port. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 In the Properties dialog box, select the Preferred Physical Port from the drop-down menu. 4 Click OK.

154

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports

Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports System Manager provides IO card and port information such as type, location, and status. Use these tasks to view information about iSCSI cards and ports.

View iSCSI Card Information When you select the iSCSI node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of iSCSI cards in the controller. When you select a specific IO card, System Manager displays details about the selected card. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers and IO Cards. 2 Click on iSCSI. The window displays status and other information about all iSCSI IO Cards installed in the controller.

For virtual ports, a control port was created during virtual port setup for each iSCSI fault domain. The control port resides in the System Tree within the iSCSI folder. In a dualcontroller configuration, the control port can reside within the iSCSI folder of either controller. All iSCSI ports on both controllers in the same fault domain use the same control port. Traffic is redirected to the appropriate virtual port.

Dell Compellent

155

Chapter 6 Controllers

3 In the System Tree, select a specific iSCSI card. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO card. For virtual ports, Hardware-related tab options are omitted, since the port is not reliant on a specific IO card.

Legacy Mode View

Virtual Port Mode View Physical Port

156

Virtual Port

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports

View iSCSI Control Port Information System Manager communicates to iSCSI ports through the control port address, and all traffic is redirected from the control port to the appropriate virtual port. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers and IO Cards. 1 Click on iSCSI. 2 Select a specific iSCSI card. 3 Select a control port. •

You cannot change information in this view, but you can select and copy it into other windows.

•

The port number is the TCP port number. The default iSCSI port number is 3260 but it can be changed if there is a special requirement to use different TCP port number.

See Also Change the iSCSI Card Port Number on page 162 About VLAN Tagging on page 164

Dell Compellent

157

Chapter 6 Controllers

View Advanced iSCSI Card Information Information and tabs displayed vary depending on whether you have remote connections set up using Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). For information about CHAP, see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. System Manager displays general iSCSI card information. 2 Click the Advanced tab. The iSCSI advanced card information appears.

158

Field

Description

Port Number

TCP port number.

Enable Data Digest

An iSCSI data digest enables a digest (32 bit CRC) on all iSCSI data Protocol Data Units (PDUs) — may be Yes or No.

Enable Header Digest

Shows if enabled — may be Yes or No.

Enable Immediate Write Data

Shows if enabled — may be Yes or No.

Window Size

Size of window may be from 32 to 2048 KB.

Keep Alive Timeout

May be from 5 seconds to 18 hours.

SCSI Command Data Timeout

May be from 5 second to 18 hours.

Default Time to Wait

May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.

Default Time to Retain

May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.

CHAP Authentication

Shows if enabled — may be Yes or No.

CHAP Name

CHAP name if enabled.

CHAP Secret

CHAP secret if enabled.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports

View iSCSI IO Card Connectivity Use the Connectivity tab to display IO card and port information such as WWN, port and IP address. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 Click the Connectivity tab. System Manager displays iSCSI card connectivity, if any.

Note: Information and tabs displayed vary depending on whether you have remote connections set up using CHAP. For information about CHAP, see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174.

View iSCSI Hardware Information Use the Hardware tab to display specific card information and shows the card location within the controller. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 Click the Hardware tab.

Dell Compellent

•

The port location is highlighted.

•

Mousing over the port displays port name and type.

•

Right-click to open the shortcut menu, from which you can view Properties and status.

159

Chapter 6 Controllers

View iSCSI Performance Charts Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. If virtual ports are enabled, performance charts include a drop-down menu from which to select a port to view. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 Click the Charts tab.

Legacy Mode View

Virtual Port Mode View

160

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports

Change an iSCSI Control Port Fault Domain 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI control port. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Edit Fault Domain. 3 Edit or change the fault domain.

Change iSCSI Control Port IP Settings 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI control port. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Edit Fault Domain. 3 Select the IP Settings tab. 4 Change the IP Address, Net Mask, or Gateway.

Change the iSCSI Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to change the User Alias name. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The dialog box opens with the General tab selected.

3 Enter a user alias (port name). 4 Click OK. The new name appears in the System Tree.

Dell Compellent

161

Chapter 6 Controllers

Reset IO Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to reset the User Alias name. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click Reset User Alias. 4 Click OK.

Change the IP Address Use the Properties dialog box to change the iSCSI card IP address. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP Address for the card. 4 Click OK.

Change the iSCSI Card Port Number The default iSCSI port number is 3260 but you can change it if there is a special requirement to use a different TCP port number. Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change the iSCSI port number. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab.

4 Enter the new TCP Port Number. 5 Click OK.

162

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports

Change Digest Settings Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change iSCSI digest settings. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Check or clear the options as needed: •

Enable Data Digest: Check to enable data digest processing. An iSCSI data digest enables a digest (32 bit CRC) on all iSCSI data Protocol Data Units (PDUs). Default is off.

•

Enable Header Digest: Check to enable header processing. Default is off.

•

Enable Immediate Data Write: Check to enable data to be included as part of the write command PDU. Default is off.

5 Click OK.

Change Window Size Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change iSCSI data window size. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Enter a window size between 16 Kb and 32 Mb. The window size must be divisible by 16 Kb. 5 Click OK.

Change Timeout Duration Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change timeout values. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Set the timeout values as needed:

Dell Compellent

•

Keep Alive Data Timeout: Duration between two keep-alive data transmissions in idle condition. May be between 5 seconds and 18 hours.

•

SCSI Command Data Timeout: Timeout period after which the SCSI controller, upon detecting that a command has not received a response, will timeout. May be between 5 seconds and 18 hours.

•

Default Time to Wait: May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.

•

Default Time to Retain: May be from 1 second to 10 minutes.

163

Chapter 6 Controllers

About Jumbo Frames Note: Not all cards support jumbo frames. Enabling jumbo frames in the Storage Center controller can enhance network throughput and reduce use of the CPU. A jumbo frame is 9000 bytes compared to normal size of 1500 bytes. Throughput for large file transfers, such as large multimedia or data files, is increased by enabling larger payloads in each packet. Larger payloads create more efficient throughput and require fewer packets to be sent. Environments with iSCSI servers running software initiators using standard or smarter NICs receive the biggest benefit from jumbo frames. Enabling jumbo frames can speed up iSCSI performance by about 5 percent, while reducing server CPU utilization by two percent to three percent. Jumbo frames are recommended only for LAN environments. Because TOE (TCP off-load engine) cards and HBAs already do off-loading, CPU savings from jumbo frames is minimal.

Enabling Jumbo Frames Use the General tab of Properties dialog box to change the Frame size. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. IO card properties information appears. 3 Set the Maximum Transmission Unit to 9000. 4 Click OK. See Also Jumbo Frames and Flow Control on page 346

About VLAN Tagging Note: Not all cards support VLAN tagging. For VLAN setting recommendations, see Other iSCSI Settings on page 347. A virtual local area network (VLAN) is configured on the system switch. A VLAN consists of a network of computers that behave as if connected to the same wire — even though they may be physically connected to different segments of a LAN. System Manager does not know or need to know how VLAN membership is configured on a switch. The Storage Center iSCSI I/O port is an end station to the VLAN. VLAN can be enabled or disabled on an iSCSI port. The default is disabled. VLANs:

164

•

Increase the number of broadcast domains but reduce the size of each broadcast domain, which in turn reduces network traffic and increases network security (both of which are hampered in cases of single large broadcast domains).

•

Reduce management effort to create subnetworks.

•

Reduce hardware requirement, as networks can be logically instead of physically separated.

•

Increase control over multiple traffic types.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

About VLAN Tagging

Each Storage Center iSCSI I/O card can be configured with VLAN identifier (VID). When a VID is configured, Storage Center becomes an end station in the VLAN. When VLAN tagging is enabled, all outbound Ethernet frames are tagged. When VLAN tagging is not enabled, all outbound Ethernet frames are untagged. If the card is plugged into a switch that has been configured with a VLAN, the switch inserts the VID into the untagged Ethernet frame. When VLAN tagging is enabled, all inbound Ethernet frames must be tagged and the VID must match the configured VID for that interface. If the inbound Ethernet frame does not match the configured VID, the frame is discarded. Discarding frames is called VLAN filtering. When VLAN tagging is disabled, the inbound Ethernet frame must be untagged; otherwise Ethernet frame is discarded.

Enable VLAN Tagging 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The IO Card Properties dialog box appears. 3 Select Enable VLAN Tagging. 4 Enter a VLAN ID (VID) to match the configured VID on the switch, from 1 to 4095. 5 Enter a user priority number. In the event of congestion, this gives a priority to the VLAN. Zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest. 6 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

165

Chapter 6 Controllers

Viewing SAS Cards System Manager provides IO card and port information such as type, location, and status. Use these tasks to view information about SAS cards and ports.

View SAS IO Card Information When you select the SAS node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of SAS cards in the controller. When you select a specific IO card, System Manager displays details about the selected card. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers and IO Cards. 2 Click on SAS. The window displays status and other information about SAS IO cards installed in the controller. 3 Select a specific SAS card. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO card.

166

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing SAS Cards

View SAS IO Card Connectivity Status Use the Connectivity tab to display SAS card and port information such as WWN, Status, Role, and Port ID. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers and IO Cards. 2 Click on SAS. 3 Click the Connectivity tab. SAS IO card connectivity information appears.

Dell Compellent

167

Chapter 6 Controllers

View SAS Port Properties Select a port to view the port properties in the General tab. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers, IO Cards, and SAS nodes. 2 Select a specific SAS card. 3 Select a specific SAS port. 4 Select the General tab.

168

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing SAS Cards

View SAS Port Location Use the Hardware tab to view port locations on the controller. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers, IO Cards, and SAS nodes. 2 Select a specific SAS card. 3 Select a specific SAS port. 4 Select the Hardware tab. The port location is highlighted. •

Mouse over the port to display port name and type.

•

Right-click to open the shortcut menu, from which you can view Properties and status.

Field

Description

Description

Description of the port.

Revision

Revision of the hardware.

Firmware Version

Version of the hardware firmware.

Device Name

Name of device, such as PCIDEV.

Slot Type

Name of slot, such as PCI-E.

Slot

Number of slot from left (6) to right (1).

Slot Port

Number of slot port from top (1) to bottom (4).

SFP Data

Data sent by Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFPs). SFPs allow network operators to connect different interface types to the same network equipment using an SFP port.

View SAS IO Card Performance Charts Use the Charts tab to read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. 1 In the System Tree, select a SAS port. 2 Select the Chart tab. The SAS chart appears.

Dell Compellent

169

Chapter 6 Controllers

Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection After a local (source) Storage Center is connected to a remote (target) Storage Center and the remote Storage Center is connected back to the local Storage Center, you can replicate volumes. All replications are managed using Enterprise Manager. •

Remote Fibre Channel Connections: Storage Center automatically detects a Storage Center system connected through Fibre Channel (FC). After being recognized, remote FC systems appear in the System Tree.

•

Remote iSCSI Connections: iSCSI facilitates data transfers over IP networks. Unlike FC, which requires special-purpose cabling, iSCSI can be run over long distances using an existing IP network infrastructure. A Remote Storage Center connects an iSCSI port on one Storage Center to an iSCSI port on another Storage Center.

Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports Use the Storage Management menu to add a remote Storage Center to a local Storage Center. From the Storage Management menu, select, System→Setup→ Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections menu or you can use the shortcut menu as described in the following steps. 1 Select an iSCSI folder. In a dual-controller configuration, it does not matter which of the two folders you select. Connecting the remote Storage Center to the cards in one controller connects the remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections.

170

•

If the local Storage Center has CHAP enabled, the configure CHAP wizard starts. If you are using CHAP, see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174.

•

If the local Storage Center is not using CHAP, the Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections page appears asking if NAT is configured.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection

Note: NAT is not available in configurations using virtual ports, so if either the local or remote Storage Center is using virtual ports, NAT is not enabled. •

If NAT is enabled, go to Step 3.

•

If NAT is not enabled, go to Step 4.

3 If NAT is enabled: a Click Yes NAT. b Enter the NAT IP addresses and iSCSI names for the remote Compellent iSCSI cards. c Click Continue. The link speed page appears. Continue with Step Step 7. 4 If NAT is not enabled, click No NAT. The next page appears.

5 Add the remote addresses: •

If the remote Storage Center is using iSCSI virtual ports, add the IP addresses of the control port.

•

If the remote Storage Center is not using iSCSI virtual ports, add the IP addresses of each IO card.

6 Click Continue. The link speed page appears. 7 Enter the speed of the network link between this Storage Center and the remote Storage Center: T1, T3/100 MB, Gigabit, or greater. 8 Click Continue or Advanced. The Advanced Options page appears.

Dell Compellent

171

Chapter 6 Controllers

9 Keep or change any of the following: •

Port number

•

Enable or disable data digest

•

Enable or disable header digest

•

Enable or disable immediate data

•

Select a window size, from 16KB to 2048 KB

•

Select a keep alive time-out, from 3 seconds to 18 hours

•

Select a SCSI command data time-out, from 3 seconds to 18 hours

10 Click Continue. If the Link Speed page reappears. Click Continue again. The Add Remote System confirmation page appears. 11 Click Add Now. The local Storage Center now recognizes the remote system. But before the Remote System configuration is complete, you must log into the remote Storage Center and identify the local Storage Center. 12 To identify the local Storage Center to the remote Storage Center: a Log into the remote Storage Center. b Repeat the steps described in Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports on page 170.

View Remote iSCSI Connections Follow these tasks to view remote iSCSI connection information in System Manager. The exact information displayed depends on whether Storage Center uses Virtual Port mode or Legacy Port mode. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. Remote Compellent iSCSI Connections information appears.

172

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection

Change Advanced Remote Connection Properties Follow these tasks to configure remote connection properties. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 4 Click Advanced. The Advanced Remote Compellent Connection Properties page appears. 5 Change any of the following: •

Port number.

•

Enable or disable data digest.

•

Enable or disable header digest.

•

Enable or disable immediate data.

•

Select a window size, from 16KB to 2048 KB.

•

Select a keep alive time-out, from 3 minutes to 18 hours.

•

Select a SCSI command data time-out, from 3 seconds to 18 hours.

6 Click OK.

Delete iSCSI Remote Connections Follow these tasks to remove iSCSI remote connections in the Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. The Delete iSCSI Remote Connection page appears. 4 Select delete from all IO cards or just the selected IO card. 5 Click Yes. Connection is deleted.

Dell Compellent

173

Chapter 6 Controllers

Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an iSCSI security option that provides connection authentication based on secrets (essentially passwords) that are exchanged when a connection is established. After enabling CHAP on each Storage Center, subsequent steps depend on whether Storage Center(s) are using Legacy Port Mode or Virtual Port Mode. Steps may include some or all of the following: •

Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) on page 176.

•

Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Legacy Port Mode) on page 178.

•

Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Virtual Port Mode) on page 178

•

Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Virtual Port Mode) on page 179 Note: Bi-directional (mutual) CHAP is supported only in Legacy Port mode. It is not supported between Storage Centers using virtual ports.

Display Remote CHAP Initiators Before configuring new CHAP initiators, you can view existing remote CHAP initiators. 1 In the System Tree, select a control port or an iSCSI IO port. •

In Virtual Port Mode, CHAP is enabled in the Properties of the control port.

•

In Legacy Port Mode, CHAP is enabled in the Properties of each iSCSI IO port.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. Property information appears displaying the Remote CHAP Initiator tab. This tab displays information about existing CHAP initiators.

Add a Remote CHAP Initiator Follow these tasks to add a remote CHAP initiator to Storage Center. The only difference between adding a remote CHAP initiator and a remote Storage Center CHAP initiator is that Storage Center enters the first part of the Compellent IQN name in the remote Compellent initiator page. 1 In the System Tree, select the iSCSI node. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Add Remote CHAP Initiators. 3 Enter the CHAP Name and CHAP Secret of the remote CHAP initiator to be added to the control port or IO card. Note: Server CHAP Secret is required only if using bi-directional authentication. Bi-directional authentication is only supported in Legacy Port mode. 4 Click Add Now. The remote CHAP initiator is added.

Enable CHAP Follow these tasks to enable CHAP in the Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree, select a port. •

In Virtual Port Mode, select the iSCSI control port.

•

In Legacy Port Mode, select an iSCSI card.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. IO card property information appears.

174

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP

3 Click the CHAP tab. The IO Card Properties dialog box appears.

System Manager supplies the CHAP Name, which is an iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN). For local (non-remote) Compellent connections, you cannot change this name. •

In Legacy Port Mode, CHAP Name is the IQN name of the selected physical port.

•

In Virtual Port Mode, CHAP Name is the IQN name of the selected control port.

4 Check CHAP Authentication. The CHAP Secret field is no longer grayed out. 5 For bi-directional authentication, enter a 12-character alphanumeric secret (similar to a password) in the CHAP Secret field. Note: If you are using a QLogic QLA4010, Storage Center requires a CHAP Secret. If you leave CHAP Secret blank when configuring a QLA4010 card, System Manager asks you to enter a CHAP Secret. 6 Click OK. System Manager warns you that saving these changes will disrupt iSCSI traffic. 7 Click Save Changes to save your changes. Or, click Cancel to abandon your changes.

Dell Compellent

175

Chapter 6 Controllers

Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select an individual card (in Legacy Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. 1 Log on to the Storage Center on which you enabled CHAP. 2 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI node. Note: In a dual-controller configuration, it does not matter which of the two iSCSI folders you select. Connecting the remote Storage Center to cards in one controller connects remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers.

3 From the shortcut menu, select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. The Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections to IO Card wizard starts.

176

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP

4 Enter the IP Address and iSCSI Name of the remote Compellent iSCSI port. Note: IP addresses are displayed in the iSCSI folder of the remote Storage Center. You can copy an iSCSI name from the iSCSI Name field of the remote Compellent iSCSI port. 5 Click Continue. The next page of the wizard is displayed. 6 Enter the CHAP Name and specify a Target Secret for the remote Compellent iSCSI port. Note: The Remote Target Secret must be at least 12 alphanumeric characters. It is the primary secret used in the connection initiation process. 7 Check or clear the check box to enable or disable Bi-directional Authentication. 8 Click Continue. 9 Select a link speed from the drop-down menu. 10 Click Continue. The CHAP verification page appears. 11 Click Add Now. 12 Repeat steps 1 through 11 for all remote Compellent Connections.

Dell Compellent

177

Chapter 6 Controllers

Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Legacy Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select an individual card (in Legacy Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. 1 In the System Tree, select the iSCSI card node. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators. The Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators wizard starts. 3 Enter the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent connection. Note: To complete the CHAP Name, you can copy the CHAP name from the remote Compellent port. 4 Enter the Remote Target Secret of the remote Compellent connection to be added to the IO card. Note: The Remote Target Secret defined in the remote Compellent CHAP initiator must match the Target Secret used when adding the remote CHAP enabled Compellent connection to the local Storage Center. 5 (Conditional) If using bi-directional CHAP, enter the Remote Port Secret. Note: You can find the Remote Port Secret on the Advanced tab of the local iSCSI port in the CHAP Secret field. 6 Click Add Now. The remote CHAP Initiator is added. 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remote Compellent connection you are adding.

Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Virtual Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select a control port (in Virtual Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. 1 In the System Tree, select the iSCSI folder. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. The Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard starts. 3 Enter the IP Address of the remote Compellent domain control port. 4 Click Continue. 5 Enter the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent domain control port. 6 Enter a Target Secret. Note: Bi-directional CHAP is not supported between remote Storage Centers using virtual ports. 7 Click Continue. 8 Select a link speed from the drop-down menu. 9 Click Continue. 10 Click Add Now.

178

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP

Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Virtual Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder, the connection or initiator is added for all ports. If you select a control port (in Virtual Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. Note: Adding remote CHAP initiators for each remote physical port in the domain is required for retain remote connections during controller failover. 1 Log on to a Storage Center on which you enabled CHAP. 2 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI folder. Note: In a dual-controller configuration, it does not matter which of the two iSCSI folders you select. Connecting the remote Storage Center to cards in one controller connects remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers.

3 From the shortcut menu, select Add Remote CHAP Initiators.

4 Enter the iSCSI Name of the remote Compellent physical port. You can copy the iSCSI Name from the iSCSI Name field of the remote Compellent iSCSI port. 5 Add the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent domain control port. You can easily copy the CHAP Name from the remote Compellent domain control port. 6 Enter the Target Secret in the Server CHAP Secret field.

Dell Compellent

179

Chapter 6 Controllers

Note: The Target Secret defined for the remote CHAP initiator must match the Target Secret used when adding the remote CHAP enabled Compellent connection to the local Storage Center. 7 Click Add Now. 8 Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each remote Compellent physical port connection in the iSCSI domain.

Disable CHAP Follow these tasks to disable CHAP in the Storage Center. Note: If you disable CHAP, you must re-do all remote Compellent connections. 1 In the System Tree, select a control port or iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the CHAP tab. 4 Uncheck CHAP Authentication. 5 Click OK.

Change CHAP Authentication Settings Follow these tasks to modify CHAP authentication requirements in the Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. 3 Click Properties. 4 Click CHAP. 5 Select or clear CHAP Authentication Enabled. If it is enabled, enter the remote IO card secret. 6 Select or clear Perform Mutual Authentication. If you select mutual authentication, enter the connection secret and the remote connection secret.

Delete Remote CHAP Initiators from a Server Follow these tasks to remove CHAP initiators from the server. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Remote CHAP Initiators. 3 Click Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Yes. The CHAP initiator is deleted.

180

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing IO Card Changes

Managing IO Card Changes The Configure IO Card Changes wizard simplifies the task of moving, replacing, upgrading, or re-purposing IO cards in Storage Center controllers. The wizard is used to configure IO card hardware changes on a per-port basis after physical IO card changes have been made. The wizard is typically used when upgrading IO cards or controllers. For each local port, you can specify: •

If an IO card should be linked to an existing configuration

•

If the IO card is new hardware

•

If the configuration for a removed IO card should be deleted

The wizard guides you through the following actions: •

Associating IO cards with existing port configurations

•

Indicating which IO cards are new hardware

•

Deleting configurations for IO cards that have been removed

Before using the wizard, you should be aware of the following: •

Changes should be performed by a certified installer or with the assistance of Dell Technical Support Services.

•

At least one back-end port must remain in its original location.

•

A controller restart is required to implement changes.

•

Do not rebalance any ports until controller(s) have been replaced and all hardware configuration changes are complete.

Plan a Hardware Change Upon boot, the Storage Center searches back-end targets for the configuration. Because a controller cannot boot without configuration information, back-end access must be maintained during the controller replacement procedure. This can be done in two ways: •

Keep at least one common back-end slot/port defined and connected in the same manner on the new hardware configuration as it was on the old hardware configuration.

•

Connect the back-end to a port that is undefined on the new hardware configuration. Storage Center is able to detect iSCSI targets and acquire the boot configuration from the drives even though the slot/port is marked as undefined.

When the appropriate back-end slot/port is identified, record this information on the Port Usage Work Sheet and continue the upgrade process. See Also Port Usage Work Sheet on page 184

Dell Compellent

181

Chapter 6 Controllers

Change the Hardware Changing hardware follows these general tasks. Refer to upgrade documentation for the specific change for more detailed instructions. 1 Power down and unplug the controller. This reduces down time by facilitating recabling. In a dual-controller Storage Center, the second controller takes on all functions of the Storage Center, preventing a system outage. 2 Record/tag the cabling for the affected card. 3 Disconnect the cables on the IO card. 4 Replace, move, or remove the IO card(s) and reconnect as recorded on the Port Usage Work Sheet. 5 Plug in and power on the controller. See Also Port Usage Work Sheet on page 184

Configure IO Card Changes Use the IO Card Change wizard to match previous port configurations with new ports. 1 Access the Configure IO Card Changes wizard in one of two ways: •

Upon log on or browser refresh, System Manager automatically launches the wizard if hardware changes are detected.

•

Right click on a controller and select Configure IO Card Changes.

2 When the wizard starts, note any warnings and click Continue to proceed. Columns and information displayed on the next page of the wizard may differ depending upon the transport type selected and whether the IO card represents existing, new, or removed hardware. Note: Replacing cards with different connection types (for example, FC with SAS) may result in the previously occupied slot/port being placed in a down state (Status = Down). The slot/port will be placed in an up state (Status = Up) when the new configuration is saved and the controller is restarted.

182

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing IO Card Changes

Local ports are displayed separated by transport type (FC, iSCSI, or SAS). Select the appropriate tab to configure the IO card changes for the ports of each transport type. The columns and information displayed may differ depending upon the transport type selected and whether the IO card is existing, new or removed hardware. The pane identifies IO cards that have changed by: •

Displaying Yes in the Changed column.

•

If applicable, the Previous Description and Previous Device Type fields contain information about the IO card that previously occupied the slot/port.

Assign a New Link Configuration System Manager may match a port to an existing configuration that appears to fit. Examine each Link to determine if they are appropriate. 1 Use the drop-down menu in the Link to Configuration for Physical Port column to assign new link configurations. Values for each port vary by transport type and whether the IO card has been removed. •

New IO Card. Do not use any existing port configurations. – Indicates the port will be configured as new hardware. Any existing configurations for the port are deleted.

•

IO Card has been removed. Delete existing port configuration. – Indicates that System Manager has detected that the IO card for the port has been removed and the existing configuration for the port should be deleted. Before selecting this option, confirm that the IO card has actually been removed from the Storage Center and that you want to delete the configuration for the port.

•

Not Set – A placeholder that indicates a selection needs to be made for the port. For ports with an existing IO card, this indicates that the System Manager is unable to automatically link to an existing port configuration.

•

For ports on IO cards that have not been removed, a selection is shown for each existing physical port configuration of the selected transport type. If there are no IO card changes detected for the slot/port, the default is to use the existing configuration for the port.

2 Click Assign Now. You are asked if you want to reset the controller. A controller restart is required for new port roles to be assigned. Note: To restore the default port selection for a selected transport, click Restore Defaults. Resetting port configuration to the default selection overrides any existing port selections. 3 Click Yes when asked if you want to restart the controller. 4 Repeat the process starting from Change the Hardware on page 182 to update the remaining controller if required.

Restore a Default Port Selection Select the Restore Defaults button to restore the default port selection for the selected transport. Resetting port configuration to the default selection will override any existing port selections.

Dell Compellent

183

Chapter 6 Controllers

Port Usage Work Sheet For each controller, print and complete a copy of the following worksheet to record the current configuration and the planned configuration changes. Caution: One back end port must remain in the same location to enable access to existing configuration information. Without this connection, the system will not boot. BE Continuity Slot / Port

Slot 1

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Port 3

Port 4

Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port

Slot 2 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port

Slot 3 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port

Slot 4 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port

Slot 5 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port

Slot 6

Port 1

Port 2

Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port

184

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Rebalancing Local Ports

Rebalancing Local Ports Storage Center balances data storage between controller ports. If a controller has been added or taken offline, ports can become unbalanced. Note: Access is restricted while the rebalancing process is in progress. 1 In the System Tree, click the Controller icon. System Manager lists the controllers and displays the local port condition as unbalanced. 2 From the display, right-click the Controller icon. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Rebalance Local Ports. 4 (Optional) To clear the automatic reminder from System Manager to rebalance local ports, in the Rebalance Local Ports dialog box, select or clear Check for unbalanced local ports at startup.

Dell Compellent

185

Chapter 6 Controllers

User Interface Reference for Controllers This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show controller information.

Controller General Tab Selecting a controller in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across the top. Each tab provides information about the controller. The controller General tab provides an overview of the selected controller.

186

Field

Description

Controller Name

Name of current controller.

Type

Object type, in this case controller.

Model

Model number of the controller

Total Memory

Amount of memory installed in the controller.

Available Memory

Amount of unused memory.

Controller ID

Number that identifies the Storage Center.

Dell Asset Tag

Number assigned to the controller for tracking or security purposes.

Dell Service Tag

Number that identifies the controller to Dell Technical Support Services.

Version

Software version of controller.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Controllers

Dell Compellent

Field

Description

Leader

Indicates if a controller is the leader (True) or not the leader (False). If a controller is not the leader, it is a peer.

Last Boot Time

Date and time of last reboot.

Status

Status of controller — may be Up or Down.

Local Port Condition

Condition of local port — may be Balanced or Unbalanced.

Ether0 (MGMT) Interface

IP, Net Mask, and Gateway addresses for the ethernet management interface.

Primary DNS Server

Address of the primary Domain Name System (DNS) server.

Secondary DNS Server

(Optional) Address of the secondary Domain Name System (DNS) server.

Domain Name

Domain name for the controller.

Date Created

Date that the controller was set up for use in Storage Center.

Created By

System user name under which the controller was set up.

Date Updated

Date that the controller software was updated.

Updated By

System user name under which the controller was updated.

Notes

Additional information entered about the controller.

187

Chapter 6 Controllers

Controller CPU PerformanceTab The controller CPU Performance tab shows the CPU and memory usage for the most current one-hour period.

Controller Back Tab The controller CPU Back tab shows IO card, port, and power supply locations.

188

•

Hover the cursor over an object to view more information.

•

Right-click on an object to view additional options.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Controllers

Controller General Properties Selecting a controller in the System Tree and clicking Properties opens a page with a set of tabs across the top. Each tab provides information about the controller. The controller General tab provides an overview of the selected controller.

Field

Description

Controller Name

Name of current controller.

Type

Object type, in this case controller.

Status

Status of controller — may be Up or Down.

Local Port Condition

Condition of local port — may be Balanced or Unbalanced.

Leader

Indicates if a controller is the leader (True) or not the leader (False). If a controller is not the leader, it is a peer.

Controller ID

Number that identifies the Storage Center.

Last Boot Time

Date and time of last reboot.

See Also Change the Controller Name on page 142

Dell Compellent

189

Chapter 6 Controllers

Controller IP Properties Use the IP tab to set or change IP addresses. This tab is used primarily to set the IP address when using IPv6 for communication with Storage Center. Caution: Do not change IP properties in the Controller Properties dialog box without the guidance of a Dell Technical Support Services. Changing IP properties can result in the loss of data.

Field

Description

Ether0 (MGMT) Interface

IP, Net Mask, and Gateway addresses for the ethernet MGMT interface. Storage Center uses IPv4 for the Management Interface, however IPv6 may be used. For IPv6, you must also enter the IPv6 Prefix Length.

190

Ether1 (IPC) Interface

IP, Net Mask, and Gateway addresses for the ethernet IPC interface. IPC Interface must use IPv4.

Primary DNS Server

Address of the primary Domain Name System (DNS) server.

Secondary DNS Server

(Optional) Address of the secondary Domain Name System (DNS) server.

Domain Name

Domain name for the controller.

iDRAC (BMC) Interface

(Conditional) iDRAC is the Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller. BMC is the Baseboard Management Controller. •

Configure via: Displays network configuration mode — may be Static or DHCP.

•

If iDRAC is configured as Static, addresses are displayed for IP, Net Mask, and Gateway. If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is configured, these fields are blank.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Controllers

See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142

Controller Info Properties Use the Info tab to view creation and update information about the controller and to add notes for reference.

See Also Add Controller Notes on page 142

Dell Compellent

191

Chapter 6 Controllers

192

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

7

Disks This section describes how to view and manages disks and disk folders, and work with Storage Profiles. Only administrators can perform these tasks. Some commands, indicated in the command description, are available only when specifically included in administrator privileges.

Contents Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Managing Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Rebalancing RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Managing Disk Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Managing Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 About Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Applying Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Managing Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Using Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 User Interface Reference for Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Dell Compellent

193

Chapter 7 Disks

Disk Management System Manager displays disks both physically and logically. •

Physically, disks are grouped by the enclosure in which they reside as shown in the Enclosures folder.

•

Logically, disks by type, such as a 7.2K, 10K, 15K, or Solid State Disk (SSD). Disks types are grouped without regard to IO speed. For example, 7.2K disks in a SAS enclosure is in the same RAID level as 7.2K drives in an SBOD enclosure. A disk folder contains both managed and spare drives. Managed drives are used for data storage. Spare drives are held in reserve to automatically replace a drive if a managed drive fails.

Storage Types Storage type describes a pool of storage (disk folder) with a single datapage size and a specified redundancy level. The standard storage type is 2 MB redundant. This selection is appropriate for most applications. However, the following additional page sizes are also available: •

512 KB: Appropriate for applications with high performance needs, or in environments in which Replays are taken frequently under heavy IO. Selecting this size reduces the amount of space System Manager can present to servers.

•

4 MB: Appropriate for systems that use a large amount of disk space with infrequent Replays.

The ability to change the datapage size and redundancy settings to create a non-standard storage type are available on the Advanced tab of System Management → Volume → Configure My Volume Defaults menu option. Note: Because Data Progression (an automatic process that moves infrequently accessed data to slower disks) cannot move data between storage types, a second storage type is a less efficient use of storage. You should create a non-standard storage type only when an application program requires a datapage size smaller or larger than the default 2 MB datapage. See Also Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210.

Storage Classes Storage classes exist within each storage type for which a disk folder has been prepared. Each storage class represents allocated RAID space within a tier of disks in the disk folder. For redundant storage types, RAID levels of storage classes within each tier depend on the redundancy level selected for that tier.

194

•

Single-redundant tiers can contain storage classes of RAID 10, RAID 5-5, or RAID 5-9.

•

Dual-redundant tiers can contain storage classes of RAID 10-Dual Mirror, RAID 6-6, or RAID 6-10.

•

Non-redundant storage types use RAID 0 in all classes, in all tiers.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Disks

Managing Disks As data begins to consume disk space, you will need to add enclosures and disks to the Storage Center. The supported maximum number of enclosures attached to a Storage Center depends on the type of enclosure being used. When adding disks, be aware of the following: •

After disks are added, additional space may not be immediately available. Make sure that you allow enough time for System Manager to allocate space to be used for writes.

•

Create a new disk folder only to address specific application program requirements. Creating a second disk folder may cause storage to be used less efficiently.

•

Data cannot be written to unassigned disks.

•

The Assigned disk folder was created when the Storage Center was set up. Managing unassigned disks means moving the disk into a managed (Assigned) disk folder.

View Tiers Disks are initially configured when Storage Center is set up. In most configurations, all disks form a single pool of storage in a managed disk folder. By default, the managed disk folder is named Assigned. Disks of different classifications, such as 15K or 10K are all part of the managed disk folder. Storage Center assigns disks of different classifications to one of three tiers. Tier 1 is the highest performance tier; Tier 3 is the most cost efficient tier. 1 In the System Tree, select the Assigned disk folder. Disk tiers appear.

Note: Storage Center automatically migrates less frequently accessed data to lower tiers.

Dell Compellent

195

Chapter 7 Disks

Modify Tier Redundancy Modifying tier redundancy requires a RAID rebalance to be completed, and should not be performed unless sufficient free disk space is available within the disk folder. Storage tiers are automatically ranked by disk performance. Tier 1 is fastest and Tier 3 the slowest. 1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Configure Storage. The Configure Storage wizard starts. Use this screen to configure the redundancy level of each tier of storage within this storage type.

3 Click Modify Tier Redundancy for the tier to change.

196

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Disks

Note: Default redundancy for each disk tier is based on the size of disks in the tier. With the release of Storage Center 6.2, users can no longer change tier redundancy to single redundant in any tier with a 1 TB or larger disk drive. (Exception) Seven disks are the minimum requirement for configuring RAID 6 with a single spare. If a tier does not contain seven disks, default redundancy is single redundant for any disk drive size. 4 In the Modify Tier Redundancy dialog box, select Single Redundant or Dual Redundant. If you change from Single Redundant to Dual Redundant, notice that: •

RAID 5-5 Standard becomes RAID 6-6 Standard

•

RAID 5-5 Fast becomes RAID 6-6 Fast (if Fast Track is licensed)

•

RAID 5-9 Standard becomes RAID 6-10 Standard

•

RAID 5-9 Fast becomes RAID 6-10 Fast (if Fast Track is licensed)

•

RAID 10 Standard becomes RAID 10-DM Standard

•

RAID 10 Fast becomes RAID 10-DM Fast (if Fast Track is licensed)

5 Click OK to change redundancy or Cancel to stop the operation. 6 Repeat for all the tiers to modify. 7 Click OK. 8 If any of the modified tiers contain disks, perform a RAID Rebalance to complete the tier redundancy modification. •

If System Manager determines that there is sufficient disk space to rebalance data across drives, a rebalance is started automatically.

•

If there does not appear to be enough disk space available in the disk folder to allow for a RAID Rebalance, System Manager asks you to add storage.

See Also Managing Disks on page 195 Rebalancing RAID on page 203

Dell Compellent

197

Chapter 7 Disks

Manage Unassigned Disks The Manage Unassigned Disks wizard takes you through a three-part process in which you select the new disks, identify disks to be used as Hot Spares, and rebalance RAID. 1 In the Storage Management menu, select Disk →Scan for Disks. Storage Center scans for new disks. 2 After the scan, any unassigned disks appear in the Unassigned disk folder. If there are no unassigned disks, the Unassigned disk folder is not displayed. 3 To manage unassigned disks, select the Disks node. 4 From the shortcut menu, select Manage Unassigned Disks. The Manage Unassigned Disks wizard starts and displays a list of disks that are unassigned. 5 By default, all disks are selected. Click on a check box to deselect a disk. 6 Click Continue. Note: If there is a second disk folder, System Manager asks you to select the folder into which the new disks should be placed. Otherwise, System Manager displays a list of the disks you selected and asks you to select disks to be designated as hot spares.

7 Select the disk(s) to be designated as the hot spare(s). If a disk fails, Storage Center automatically rebuilds the data that was on the failed disk on to the hot spare disk. Hot spares do not count toward usable storage, but each spare adds to the resiliency of your Storage Center. Depending on your configuration, select one or more disks as spares. 8 Click Continue. The wizard displays the disk folder, hot spares, and disks in the disk folder you are modifying or creating, and attributes for each disk. 9 (Optional) Click Back to cycle through the previous screens to change hot spares or selected disks. 10 Click Add Disks Now to add the disks to the disk folder.

198

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Disks

•

Modify Storage: Allows you to configure a redundancy level (dual or single) for each tier of storage within the disk folder. Be sure to modify storage before you rebalance new disks.

•

Schedule Rebalance: Enables you to defer rebalancing until a later time.

•

Rebalance Now: Restripes data on to all available disks within a disk folder. Rebalancing runs in the background with low priority. Depending on your configuration, rebalancing can take as long as several days. However, to fully use all available space, disks must be rebalanced.

See Also Managing Storage Types on page 209 Rebalancing RAID on page 203 Rebalancing RAID on page 203

Dell Compellent

199

Chapter 7 Disks

Release a Managed Disk When a managed disk is released from a folder, data in the folder is re-striped on the remaining disks. For this reason, you should not release disks from a folder unless the remaining disks have enough free space to accommodate re-striping the data. Caution: Never release a managed disk without Dell Technical Support Services assistance. 1 In the System Tree, select the disk(s) to release. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Release Disk. The Release Disk wizard starts. •

If the selected disk does not contain user data, the disk is released immediately. If a rebalance is required, a dialog box opens asking if you wish to rebalance RAID devices now, later, or skip balancing. Note: Skipping the rebalance may leave disks in a transitioning state. That is, System Manager may not use the disk(s) until a balance occurs.

•

If the selected disk contains user data, the disk is not released immediately and a warning message is displayed.

•

If you selected multiple disks with and without user data, disks without user data will be released immediately and disks with user data will display a warning.

3 After the restripe is complete, if the disk does not appear in the Unassigned folder, click Scan for Disks.

200

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Disks

Revert a Released Disk to Managed If a released disk is transitioning to an unmanaged state as indicated by a yellow icon overlay, you can revert the released disk back to being managed. 1 In the System Tree, select a transitioning disk.

2 From the shortcut menu, select Revert to Managed. The Revert to Managed wizard starts.

3 Click Yes (Revert Now) to revert the disk. The disk immediately reverts to managed and a dialog box opens asking if you wish to rebalance RAID devices now, later, or skip balancing. 4 Select Skip to exit the wizard.

Dell Compellent

201

Chapter 7 Disks

Delete a Disk You can only delete disks that have failed or disks that have been released. Prerequisites Before deleing a disk make sure that one of the following is true: •

The disk has failed and it has no User Allocated Blocks. A failed disk appears with a red dot. On the General tab, its status is reported as Down and health is reported as Unhealthy.

•

The disk has been released.

Steps 1 In the System Tree, select the disk(s) to delete. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. The wizard prompts you to confirm. 3 Click Yes. System Manager deletes the disk(s) from the folder and closes the wizard. You can now physically remove the disk(s) from the Storage Center disk enclosure.

Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure Follow these steps to see where a disk is located in the enclosure. 1 In the System Tree, select a disk. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Show Disk in Enclosure. System Manager switches to physical view and the disk position is highlighted.

Alert for Disk with Single Path By default, disks have two paths to the controller. If one path is disconnected, a port fails, or a path is cabled incorrectly, the controller has only one path to the disk. This is a single point of failure. Make sure you are alerted if only one path remains to a disk. 1 In the System Tree, select the disk(s) to be included in the alert. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. System Manager displays the Disk Properties information with the General tab selected. 3 Select or clear Alert when only one path is available. 4 (Optional) Add notes on the Info tab. 5 Click OK.

202

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Rebalancing RAID

Rebalancing RAID Rebalancing RAID restripes data to optimize the use of disk space. System Manager distributes data as evenly as possible across disks in a disk folder. Operations such as adding or removing disks or modifying redundancy levels can cause data to be unevenly distributed across disks. The RAID rebalance process redistributes data. This process also can be used to move data off disks that were moved to another disk folder. RAID rebalancing moves the lowest scoring RAID devices first beginning with the smallest RAID devices. RAID rebalancing has the potential to fail or deadlock when moving some RAID devices. If this occurs, it may be necessary to add more disk space to the Storage Center to allow RAID rebalancing to complete. The following information is provided when a RAID rebalance is in progress:

Dell Compellent

Field

Description

Rebalance Start Time

Time at which the Rebalance was started.

Estimated Completion Time

Estimated time at which the rebalance completes. This information is not available until the rebalance has been running for a sufficient amount of time to create an estimate. Depending upon the amount of data on your Storage Center, the time required for RAID rebalancing can vary greatly. RAID rebalancing takes longer when a Storage Center is running low on space, or when temporary devices must be created to allow for the replacement of existing devices.

Percent Complete

Percent of allocated space that has been rebalanced.

Space Remaining

Amount of space remaining to be rebalanced of the initial amount of space requiring a rebalance.

203

Chapter 7 Disks

View Rebalance Status The RAID Rebalance wizard shows rebalance status. From the Storage Management menu select Disk→ Rebalance RAID. The RAID Rebalance wizard starts.

The wizard displays information about the current status of RAID rebalancing. The options available vary depending on the rebalance state. A RAID rebalance may be in one of the following states:

204

State

Description

Rebalance Not Needed

RAID rebalancing is not currently running and no classes of storage report requiring rebalance.

Rebalance Needed

One or more classes of storage on the Storage Center reports requiring a rebalance.

In Progress

Rebalancing is currently in progress.

Final Pass In Progress

Rebalancing is completing its final pass.

Rebalance Complete

Rebalancing is complete.

Rebalance Failed

Rebalancing has been performed, but one or more classes of storage still reports requiring a rebalance.

Rebalance Stopping

A user has requested that rebalancing be stopped.

Rebalance Stopped

Rebalancing has been stopped prematurely by a user.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Rebalancing RAID

RAID Rebalance Options Depending on the current state of RAID rebalance, the Rebalance RAID wizard may display any of the following options. Option

Description

Rebalance Now

Starts an immediate rebalancing process.

Schedule Rebalance

Allows rebalancing to be scheduled for a later time.

Stop Rebalance

Stops the rebalancing process after the current pass. This may take several minutes.

Close

Closes the RAID Rebalance wizard. If a rebalance is in progress, System Manager continues to rebalance data in the background until complete. Reopen the wizard to monitor rebalance progress by opening the Storage Management menu and selecting Disk →Rebalance RAID.

View a RAID Rebalance Schedule The RAID rebalance schedule can be accessed through the View menu. From the View menu select Scheduled Events. If scheduled, the RAID Rebalance appears as a scheduled event.

Dell Compellent

205

Chapter 7 Disks

Schedule a RAID Rebalance Although RAID rebalancing is a background process, depending on the size and activity of your Storage Center, rebalancing can take weeks. Schedule it accordingly. 1 From the Storage Management menu select Disk → Rebalance RAID. The RAID Rebalance wizard starts. 2 Click Schedule RAID Rebalance. The following wizard starts.

3 Enter the date or use the drop-down menu to view a calendar. Use the up and down arrows to select the time. 4 Click Save Schedule.

Delete a RAID Rebalance Use the View menu to locate the event to delete. 1 From the View menu, select Scheduled Events. The RAID Rebalance appears as a scheduled event. 2 Select the Rebalance event. 3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Yes.

206

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Disk Folders

Managing Disk Folders A managed disk folder was created during installation and setup. In most cases, a Storage Center should have only one folder of managed disks. If additional disks are added to the Storage Center, they should be added to the managed disk folder. Unassigned disks appear in the Unassigned Disk folder. Note: Because Data Progression does not migrate storage across disk folders, a second disk folder impacts the ability of Storage Center to maximize performance. Only in rare circumstances do the benefits of multiple disk folders outweigh the disadvantages.

Create a Disk Folder The Create Disk Folder wizard steps through the process of creating a disk folder. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Disk → Folder → Create Disk Folder. The Create Disk Folder wizard starts. If a disk folder already exists, the Create Disk Folder wizard asks if you are sure you want to create a second disk folder. 2 To create second disk folder, click Yes. System Manager displays unassigned disks to be added to the new folder. Only unassigned disks can be added to a disk folder.

3 From the list of unmanaged disks, select disks to be included in the new disk folder. By default all disks are selected. 4 Click Continue. System Manager displays the disks you selected, and asks you to select one or more disks to be a hot spare. A hot spare replaces a failed disk and is held in reserve until needed. The hot spare disk must be as large or larger than the largest disk of its type in the disk folder. For redundancy, there must be at least one hot spare  for each enclosure. By default, if there are disks of differing sizes, Storage Center selects the largest disk, or one of them. You cannot create a disk folder without a hot spare. 5 Select the disk to use as a hot spare or accept the default. 6 Click Continue. 7 Enter a folder name and any optional notes about the disk folder. 8 If not using Advanced options, go to Step 11.

Dell Compellent

207

Chapter 7 Disks

9 (Optional) Click Advanced. System Manger displays advanced options that allow you to specify tier redundancy and datapage size or to select non-redundant storage. Note: Default redundancy for each disk tier is based on the size of disks in the tier. With the release of Storage Center 6.2, users can no longer change tier redundancy to single redundant in any tier with a 1 TB or larger disk drive. (Exception) Seven disks are the minimum requirement for configuring RAID 6 with a single spare. If a tier does not contain seven disks, default redundancy is single redundant for any disk drive size. 10 Select the redundancy and datapage options and click Continue. 11 Click Create Now. The disk folder is created.

Rename a Disk Folder Folder properties are available only for local, managed disk folders. No folder properties are available for Unassigned or External Device folders. 1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder, such as Assigned. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Disk Folder Properties window appears.

3 Enter a name in the Disk Folder field. 4 Click OK.

Delete a Disk Folder Before a disk folder can be deleted, it must be empty of disks. Release or delete all disks within a folder before you delete the disk folder. 1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder. 2 Release or delete all disks within the folder 3 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. Click Yes.

208

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Storage Types

Managing Storage Types When Storage Center was setup, System Manager automatically selected redundancy levels depending upon size of disks in the folder. See the Storage Center System Setup Guide for more information.

Remove a Storage Class Removing a storage class is not allowed unless the Allow removal of storage classes user default is selected. Changes to this setting are not reflected in the Configure Storage wizard until it is closed and reopened. 1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Configure Storage. The Configure Storage wizard appears. 3 Select the Storage Class to delete. 4 Click Remove Storage Class. Note: System Manager warns you that before proceeding with this modification. It is advised that you contact Dell Technical Support Services for assistance. See Also Configuring User Volume Defaults on page 317

Add a Storage Class Changes to this setting are not reflected in the Configure Storage wizard until it is closed and reopened. 1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Configure Storage. The Configure Storage wizard appears. 3 Select a Storage Class. 4 Click Add Class. If all allowed classes of storage have been created, the Add Class option does not appear. 5 Select Continue to return to Storage Type selection.

Dell Compellent

209

Chapter 7 Disks

Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type You can prepare a disk folder for a non-standard storage type only if your User Volume defaults permit you to do so. 1 In the System Tree, select a disk folder, such as Assigned. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Configure Storage. The Configure Storage wizard opens.

3 To add another storage type, click Prepare for Additional Storage Type. Because additional storage types decrease the efficiency of Data Progression, System Manager warns you that additional storage types are inefficient. 4 Click Yes (Prepare Now). A page allowing you to select redundancy appears. 5 Click Redundant or Non-Redundant. Redundant storage may be either Single Redundant or Dual Redundant, depending upon your tier redundancy configuration and disk size. For disks that are 900GB or greater in size, that tier and all tiers below it default to dual redundant storage. •

•

210

Single-redundant storage protects against the loss of any one drive. •

RAID 10 (each disk is mirrored)

•

RAID 5-5 (striped across 5 drives)

•

RAID 5-9 (striped across 9 drives)

Dual-redundant storage protects against the loss of any two drives: •

RAID 10 Dual-Mirror (data is written simultaneously to three separate disks)

•

RAID 6-6 (4 data segments, 2 parity segments for each stripe)

•

RAID 6-10 (8 data segments, 2 parity segments for each stripe)

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type

Non-Redundant storage uses RAID 0. Data is striped but provides no redundancy. If one disk fails, all data is lost. Do not use non-redundant storage for a volume unless the data has been backed up elsewhere. 6 On the next page, select the redundancy for each tier and select the datapage size to be used. It is recommended that you only prepare a disk folder for a single datapage size to optimize disk utilization and I/O performance. Only prepare for additional types of storage to address specific application needs. Caution: If you are considering using either the 512 KB or 4 MB datapage setting, contact Dell Technical Support Services so that resources remain balanced and impact on performance is considered. •

2 MB: The default datapage size, this selection is appropriate for most application program needs.

•

512 KB: This datapage size is appropriate for application programs with high performance needs, or environments in which Replays are taken frequently under heavy I/O. Selecting this size reduces the amount of space System Manager can present to servers.

•

4 MB: This datapage size is appropriate for configurations that use a large amount of disk space with infrequent Replays.

7 Click Prepare Now. The disk folder is prepared for the selected type of storage. It is not used until a volume is created with that Storage Type. System Manager asks if you want to Prepare for Additional Storage Type or Close. 8 Click Close. See Also Set Storage Volume Defaults on page 322

Dell Compellent

211

Chapter 7 Disks

About Storage Profiles Storage Profiles provided with System Manager are the most effective way to manage data in Storage Center. For this reason, access to Storage Profiles is controlled by user settings, and Storage Profiles may not be visible to all users.

Storage Profiles Provided in System Manager If Data Progression is licensed, cost and performance are optimized when all volumes use the Recommended Storage Profile. If Data Progression is not licensed, the default Storage Profile is High Priority, which stores data on Tier 1. When Tier 1 is full, data is then stored on the next lower available tier. Without Data Progression, you must configure volumes to use a specific tier of storage. Data will not migrate between tiers. Because SSDs are automatically assigned to Storage Tier 1, the profiles that include Storage Tier 1 allow volumes to use SSD storage: •

On Storage Centers without licensed Data Progression, the High profile includes SSDs. Make sure only volumes you want to use SSDs are assigned to the High profile. Reassign all other volumes to either the Medium or Low profiles.

•

On Storage Centers with licensed Data Progression, the Recommended profile includes SSDs. Make sure only volumes you want to use SSDs are assigned to the Recommended profile. Create and apply a new profile that does not include Storage Tier 1 for all other volumes.

If your user volume defaults allow you to select a Storage Profile, System Manager displays profiles in the System Tree under the Storage node.

Recommended (All Tiers) The Recommended Storage Profile is available only when Data Progression is licensed. To optimize Data Progression and performance on the Storage Center, create volumes with the Recommended Storage Profile. The Recommended profile allows the automatic data progression between and across all storage tiers based on data type and usage.

High Priority (Tier 1) The High Priority Storage Profile provides the highest performance. High Priority limits the data stored on the highest tier of disks. It is efficient in terms of using RAID 5 or 6, but it uses more expensive media to store the data. Creating a volume using the High Priority Storage Profile stores written data on Tier 1, RAID 10 (mirrored drives). Replay data is stored on Tier 1, RAID 5/RAID 6. Storage Center does not migrate data to lower storage tiers unless Tier 1 storage becomes full.

Medium Priority (Tier 2) The Medium Priority Storage Profile provides a balance between performance and cost efficiency. Creating a volume using the Medium Priority Storage Profile stores written data on RAID 10, Tier 2. Replay data is stored on RAID 5/RAID 6, Tier 2. Storage Center does not migrate data to other storage tiers unless Tier 2 storage becomes full.

Low Priority (Tier 3) The Low Priority Storage Profile provides the most-cost efficient storage. Creating a volume using the Low Priority Storage Profile stores written data on RAID 10, Tier 3. Replay data is stored on RAID 5/6, Tier 3. Storage Center does not migrate data to higher tiers of storage unless Tier 3 storage becomes full.

212

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

About Storage Profiles

Custom Profiles for SSDs For best performance with Data Progression, Dell recommends using the storage profiles provided with System Manager. In some cases, a storage architect may recommend using one of the following custom profiles for handling specific types of data, such as for using solid state drives (SSDs) to improve application performance.

SSD Best Practice This profile uses Data Progression in a standard three-tier arrangement, placing the SSDs in Tier 1 for write operations. Use this profile when the speed of the SSD is not required for data reads. You must be in Manual Mode to set up this profile. •

Tier 1 – RAID 10 Writes

•

Tier 2 – RAID 5 Replays

•

Tier 3 – RAID 5 or RAID 6 Replays (For drives over 1 TB, dual redundancy is implemented using RAID 6.)

See Also Using Manual Storage Mode on page 218

Two-tiered Profile This profile is beneficial when the Storage Center has a limited number of SSD drives or if some data types do not need the advantage of SSD drives. •

Tier 2 – RAID 10 Writes, RAID 5 Replays

•

Tier 3 – RAID 6 Replays

Read Performance Improvement This profile uses Tier 1 for most operations, but allows data to move to other tiers if Tier 1 fills up. Tier 1 – RAID 10 Writes, RAID 5 Replays

Manual Mode If the Storage Center has fewer than nine active drives in Tier 1, but more than nine active drives in Tier 2, use Manual mode to change the stripe width. Changing the stripe width helps to maintain the efficiency of both tiers. Caution: After being enabled, Manual Mode cannot be disabled. Dell Compellent strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before enabling Manual Mode. •

Tier 1 – 5-wide stripe (SSD tier)

•

Tier 2 – 9-wide stripe

Disk Folder You can manage SSD storage without creating a custom profile by creating a disk folder to isolate volumes with high IO. This method is useful for an application with a small data set but large IO requirement. See Also Create a Disk Folder on page 207

Dell Compellent

213

Chapter 7 Disks

Applying Storage Profiles Storage Profiles can only be selected, applied, or changed if the option is set for a user in User Volume Defaults.

Identify a Storage Profile The User Volume Defaults setting determines whether Storage Profile information is available. •

If a user is allowed to select a Storage Profile, a list of available Storage Profiles will appear in the System Tree for that user.

•

If a user is not allowed to select a Storage Profile, System Manager applies the default Storage Profile to all new volumes and there is no list of available profiles in the System Tree.

The Volume General tab displays the Storage Profile attached to a volume.

Allow Storage Profile Selection Follow these steps to configure user volume default settings to allow a user to select storage profiles. If you change User Volume Defaults, new user volumes will be created using the new settings, existing volumes are not affected. 1 In the System Tree, select a user. 2 Click Configure User’s Volume Defaults or Configure new User’s Volume Defaults. 3 Make sure Allow User to Modify Preferences is checked. 4 Click the Advanced tab. Note: If Data Progression is not licensed, the Recommended profile is not displayed as a choice because data cannot be migrated between tiers. 5 Select the Default Storage Profile to be used when creating a volume. 6 Optionally, check the box that enables the user to select the Storage Profile to be used.

214

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Applying Storage Profiles

Note: Changing Advanced volume defaults can adversely affect Storage Center performance. Dell Compellent recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before changing any Advanced options. 7 Click OK. User volume defaults are set.

Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes Follow these steps to apply a Storage Profile to multiple volumes in a single task. 1 Select a Storage Profile. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Apply to Volume(s). A list of existing volumes appears. 3 Select one or more volumes. 4 Click Continue. The System Manager asks you to confirm. 5 Click Apply Now. The Storage Profile you select is applied to the selected volumes. Data will be migrated during the next scheduled Data Progression run. 6 Click OK. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214

Apply a Storage Profile to a Single Volume Follow these steps to apply a Storage Profile to a single volume. 1 Select a volume. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Volume Properties window appears. 3 Click the Storage tab. 4 Select the Storage Profile for the volume, and click OK. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214

View Volumes Configured with a Storage Profile Follow these steps to see which volumes are currently using a specific Storage Profile. 1 From the list of Storage Profiles, select a profile. The General Storage Profile window appears. 2 Click the Volumes tab. A list of volumes using this profile appears. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214

Dell Compellent

215

Chapter 7 Disks

Managing Storage Profiles The standard Storage Profiles packaged with the Storage Center cannot be modified. You can only modify user-created profiles. Changes to a Storage Profile will impact all volumes currently using the profile. To manage Storage Profiles, Allow Storage Profile Selection must be enabled in user volume defaults.

Create a New Storage Profile Follow these steps to create a new storage profile. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Manage Storage Profiles. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts, displaying all Storage Profiles. 3 Click New Profile. 4 Select a RAID level and a storage tier. 5 Click Continue. A window allowing you to name the Storage Profile appears. The default name is based on the RAID level and tiers of the profile. Accept the default or enter a new name for the Storage Profile. 6 (Optional) Add notes. 7 Click Create Now. The profile is created.

Modify a Storage Profile Follow these steps to modify an existing profile 1 In the System Tree, select Storage. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Manage Storage Profiles. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts, displaying all Storage Profiles. 3 Click Modify Profile. 4 A window appears, showing the RAID and Tier setting for this Storage Profile. 5 Select or clear RAID and tier levels. 6 Click Continue. 7 A window allowing you to name the modified Storage Profile appears. The default name is based on the RAID level and tiers of the profile. Accept the default or enter a new name for the Storage Profile. 8 (Optional) Add notes. 9 Click Apply Changes. The profile is modified. Changes will be applied to all volumes using this profile. Data will begin to move the next time Data Progression is run. 10 Click Close to close the wizard. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214

216

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Storage Profiles

Delete a User-Created Storage Profile Follow these steps to delete a storage profile. Prerequisites You cannot delete Storage Profiles that are: •

Created by the system. To view by whom a Profile was created, select a Storage Profile. The General information window displays the creator.

•

In use by a volume. To view which volumes, if any, are in use, select a Storage Profile. Click the Volumes tab.

Steps 1 In the System Tree, select Storage. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Manage Storage Profiles. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts, displaying all Storage Profiles. 3 Select a user-created Storage Profile. 4 Click Delete Profile. 5 System Manager asks you to confirm. 6 Click Yes to delete the profile. 7 Click Close to close the wizard.

Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes You can apply a Storage Profile to all volumes, all volumes in a volume group, or to selected volumes. 1 In the System Tree, select Storage. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Manage Storage Profiles. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts, displaying all Storage Profiles. 3 Click Apply Profile. A list of Volumes appears. 4 Select one or more volumes or volume groups. 5 Click Continue. System Manager displays the volume and volume folders to which this profile will be applied. 6 Review the list and click Apply Now to approve. 7 Click Close to close the wizard.

Dell Compellent

217

Chapter 7 Disks

Using Manual Storage Mode Manual Storage Mode provides access to more detailed storage options. This mode should only be used with assistance from Dell Technical Support Services.

Enable Manual Storage Mode When Manual Storage Mode is enabled, the Create Storage Profile wizard provides options for RAID 6 for dual-redundant storage. Caution: After being enabled, Manual Mode cannot be disabled. Dell Compellent strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before enabling Manual Mode. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Enable Manual Storage Mode. A warning window appears.

2 To enable, click Continue.

Create a Storage Profile in Manual Mode Manually creating a Storage Profile is the only way to create exceptions to the stripe width set in System Properties. 1 In the System Tree, select the Storage Profiles icon. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create Storage Profile. The Create Storage Profile wizard starts. Note: Choices made in the Manual Mode version of the Create Storage Profile wizard override the stripe width set in System Properties. See Viewing Background Processes on page 283. 3 When RAID levels, tiers, and redundancy (if any) are set, click Continue. Storage Center asks you to name the Storage Profile. 4 Enter a name or accept the default. 5 Click Create Now.

218

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using Manual Storage Mode

View a Storage Profile Created in Manual Mode In contrast to Storage Profiles created in normal mode, a Storage Profile that is created in Manual Mode displays more detailed information as shown below.

Instead of displaying the Writable and Replay tiers used, Storage Profiles created in Manual Mode displays all tiers, including tiers on which data will not be stored using this profile.

Change RAID Stripe Width in Manual Mode If Manual Mode is enabled you can change RAID stripe width in System Storage Properties. Changes affect only system-created Storage Profiles, not user-created Storage Profiles.

Dell Compellent

219

Chapter 7 Disks

User Interface Reference for Disks This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show disk information.

General Disk Information When you select a disk In the System Tree, general information about the disk appears in the main window.

Field

Description

Position

Listed as enclosure and position. For example, disk 01-01 resides in Enclosure 1, disk 1. To view the position of a disk in an enclosure, select a disk. From the shortcut menu, select Show Disk in Enclosure. The command displays the physical location of the disk.

Index

Number required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification.

Folder

Disk folder in which this disk resides.

Control Type

A disk can be one of following types: Spare: Reserved for use if a disk fails. Managed: Part of a managed disk folder. Data is striped across all drives in a managed disk folder (except reserved Hot Spares). Unmanaged: Disk that is recognized by Storage Center but has not yet been assigned to a managed disk folder. An unmanaged disk cannot store data. Foreign Managed: Disk recognized by the Storage Center but not managed by it. A foreign managed disk could have been managed previously by another Storage Center or another manufacturer. When the disk is assigned, it becomes managed.

Type

220

Object type — in this case disk.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Disks

Field

Description

Enclosure

Enclosures are installed and numbered starting at the bottom of a rack.

Classification

Type of disk — such as 7 K, 10 K, 15 K, or SSD.

Status

Disk status — may be Up or Down.

Health

Disk health — may be Healthy or Unhealthy.

Path Alert

Either none or alert text, such as: “Disk 5 only one path to device.”

Actual Capacity, Free Space, Various measures of disk capacity. and Manufacturer Capacity Vendor, Product, Revision, Vendor Spec, and Serial Number

Product information from vendor.

Total, Unallocated, System Allocated, User Allocated, and Bad

Block counts for various items.

Disk Statistics

Number of read/write requests, blocks, and errors.

Date Detected

Date and time Storage Center detected the disk.

Date Updated

Date and time a user last modified or managed the disk.

See Also Manage Unassigned Disks on page 198 Release a Managed Disk on page 200 Delete a Disk on page 202 Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure on page 202

Dell Compellent

221

Chapter 7 Disks

Disk Enclosure Information When you select an enclosure in the System Tree hardware status information appears in the main window.

222

Field

Description

Name

Name assigned to the enclosure.

Index

Number required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification.

Shelf ID

ID assigned with respect to other rack components.

Status Description

Disk status — may be Up or Down.

Indicator

Indicator light located on the enclosure in the rack — may be On or Off

Logical ID

Internal ID assigned to the enclosure

Enclosure Type

Type of enclosure.

Model/Revision

Dell part number and revision.

A Side Firmware

Firmware version of EMM (or SBB).

B Side Firmware

Firmware version of EMM (or SBB).

Unrecoverable Condition

Indication of failure — may be On or Off

Critical Condition

Indication of failure — may be On or Off

Non-Critical Condition

Indication of failure — may be On or Off

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Disks

Enclosure Hardware Status Expanding an enclosure in the System Tree displays the hardware nodes.

•

Temperature Sensors For an enclosure, displays temp properties including position of the sensor, status, and current temp. The temperature gauge displays temperature zones. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum temp, and upper and lower critical and warning temperatures.

•

Audible Alarms For each audible alarm in the enclosure, displays name, swap detection, status, critical alarm tone, and if the alarm is muted.

•

Cooling Fans Sensors For each blower in the fan module, displays fan status, swap detection, location, and fan speed code.

•

Disks For each disk in the enclosure, displays status, status description, swap detection, any faults, vendor and product number, port ID, and any bypasses.

•

IO Modules For each IO module in the enclosure, displays status, swap detection, physical lane status, and location.

•

Power Supplies For each power supply in the enclosure, displays name, status, swap detection, any AC/DC failures of voltage irregularities, high temp warning, high temp failures, and location.

Dell Compellent

223

Chapter 7 Disks

224

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

8

System Management Most often System Management options are selected during initial Storage Center setup as described in the Storage Center System Manager Setup Guide. However, many of these options can be modified by using the Storage Management menu.

Contents Modifying System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Finding Unmanaged Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Using Phone Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Configuring Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Managing System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Updating Storage Center Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Restarting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Shutting Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Starting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Viewing Online Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Viewing Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Responding to the Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Monitoring Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Changing the Storage Alert Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Adding Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 User Interface Reference for System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Dell Compellent

225

Chapter 8 System Management

Modifying System Properties Use these tasks to change system options such as the Storage Center name, RAID stripe width, and Data Progressions.

Rename the Storage Center Changing the system name does not have any real effect other than displaying a different name. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. The System Properties dialog box appears. 2 Enter a new name in the field next to the Compellent logo. 3 Click OK to save any changes.

226

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

Set the System Management IP Address The Management IP Address is used only for dual-controller configurations to run the System Manager software. This IP address is always connected to the leader. If the leader fails, the peer takes over the management IP. Thus users can use the same IP address to access the software even when the normal leader is down. Note: When using IPv6 addresses, the controller addresses must be set using IPv6 prior to setting the System Management IP Address. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. The System Properties dialog box appears. 2 Enter a new Management IP address. Storage Center uses IPv4 format for Management IP addresses. An IPv6 address may be added, however to use IPv6 format, the controllers must already be set with IPv6 addresses. The IP Prefix Length is set in the Controller properties. 3 Click OK to save any changes.

See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142

Dell Compellent

227

Chapter 8 System Management

Select RAID Stripe Width The default stripe width for Storage Profiles is 10 wide (RAID 6-10). Modifying this value updates the RAID 6 selections for all Storage Profiles. It also modifies the RAID 6 selections for user-created Storage Profiles unless Manual Storage Mode is enabled. In a standard Storage Center, a percentage of most-used data is storage on RAID 10 (striped and mirrored). Data that is used less is stored on RAID 6-10 (which uses an algorithm to rebuild data if one drive in the logical unit should fail). For RAID 5, the stripe width determines whether the logical unit is comprised of five or nine drives. For RAID 6, the stripe width determines whether the logical unit is comprised of six or ten drives. Distributing data across more drives is marginally more efficient, but increases vulnerability. Distributing data across fewer drives is less efficient, but marginally decreases vulnerability. Caution: Do not change the system-wide RAID level if the Storage Center is in Conservation Mode. Although it would seem logical that changing the RAID level from fewer drives to more drives would free space, the Storage Center needs additional space to hold data before restriping it. If you try to change the systemwide RAID level from five or six drives to nine or ten drives, you will run out of free space sooner. If the Storage Center is in Emergency Mode, you cannot change RAID level. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. 2 Click the Storage tab. The Storage page appears.

228

•

For RAID 5, choose between RAID 5-5, which distributes parity across five drives, or RAID 5-9, which distributes parity across nine drives.

•

For RAID 6, choose between RAID 6-6, which distributes parity across six drives, or RAID 6-10, which distributes parity across 10 drives.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

About Data Progression Data Progression is a separately licensed application program. To see if your Storage Center includes Data Progression, click the Help icon at the top of the main pane. Data Progression leverages cost and performance differences between storage tiers, allowing the maximum use of lower-cost drives for stored data, while maintaining highperformance drives for frequently-accessed data. Storage Center automatically creates tiers based on the disks in your Storage Center. Tier 1 is fastest, Tier 3 the slowest. To view classes of tiers, select a disk folder. A list of disk types by tier appears.

Schedule Data Progression Once every 24 hours, Storage Center polls blocks to see if they have been accessed. Blocks of data are then migrated up or down depending on use. The amount of time the migration takes depends on the amount of data to be migrated. Use the System Properties Data Progression tab to set the time at which Data Progression is run. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. 2 Click the Data Progression tab.

3 Use the up and down arrows to select the time to run Data Progression. 4 To limit the amount of time Data Progression runs, select a run time from the Maximum Run Time drop down menu. 5 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

229

Chapter 8 System Management

Determine if Data Progression is Running When Data Progression is running, volume statistics are not available. View the Statistics tab for the volume to see if Data Progression is running. 1 In the System Tree, select a volume. General volume properties are displayed in the main pane.

2 Click the Statistics tab. If Data Progression is running, System Manager informs you that statistics are not available while Data Progression is in progress.

Stop Data Progression Follow these steps to stop a Data Progression currently in progress. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select Volume. If the Volume menu displays the Stop Data Progression option, Data Progression is running. 2 Select Stop Data Progression. Data Progression is stopped.

230

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

Set System Cache System cache settings overwrite cache settings for individual volumes. View the settings on the System Properties Cache tab. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. 2 Click the Cache tab.

3 Select or clear the Enable Read Cache check box to enable or disable read cache. Read Cache anticipates the next read and holds it in quick volatile memory, thus improving read performance. 4 Select or clear the Enable Write Cache to enable or disable the write cache. Write Cache increases write performance by holding written data in volatile memory until it can be safely stored on disk. 5 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

231

Chapter 8 System Management

Configure Global Disk Spares Set Storage Center spare disk requirements using the Disk Sparing tab in the System Properties dialog box. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. 2 Click the Disk Sparing tab.

3 Enter the default number of spares for each storage enclosure. This is the minimum number of disks to be selected in an enclosure when creating a disk folder before a Hot Spare is selected. 4 Enter the minimum number of disks for each enclosure before auto-sparing. This is the number of disks that have to be selected in a Storage Center enclosure before a Hot Spare is selected. 5 Click OK.

232

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

Add a Login Message Add a login message such as a disclaimer, usage guidelines, or user requirements using the Message tab in the System Properties dialog box. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. 2 Click the Message tab.

3 Enter the message to appear at login. 4 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

233

Chapter 8 System Management

Add Optional Information about Storage Center Add other Storage Center information using the Info tab in the System Properties dialog box. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. 2 Click the Info tab.

3 Enter optional information about the Storage Center. 4 Click OK.

234

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

Configure Date and Time Settings The Time Settings dialog box allows you to set the current region and time zone for this Storage Center or specify the NTP server to which you would like the time to be synchronized. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Configure Time. The Time Settings dialog box appears.

2 Select the Region for the Storage Center from the drop-down list. 3 Select the Time Zone for the Storage Center from the drop-down list. Note: The options you see may vary. If a NTP time server is not available, select Configure Time Manually to set the date and time. 4 If a NTP server is available: a Select Use NTP Time Server. b Enter the IP Address or fully qualified domain name of the time server. •

If a NTP time server was previously configured, the Last NTP time server update field displays the time of the last update.

•

If a NTP Server has not been entered, the Last NTP time server update field does not appear.

5 Click OK to save the changes. If a NTP time server is set, Storage Center performs a test to make sure updates are being received from the time server.

Dell Compellent

235

Chapter 8 System Management

Configure SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is a protocol for sending email messages between servers. Storage Center uses SMTP to send automated emails to an administrator account when management is required. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Configure SMTP. The Configure SMTP dialog box appears.

2 Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SMTP mail server in the SMTP Mail Server field. 3 Enter the IP address or fully-qualified domain name of the backup SMTP mail server in the Backup SMTP Mail Server field. 4 Click Test server to test the connection(s) to the mail servers. 5 Enter the email address of the sender in the Sender E-mail Address (MAIL FROM) field, and a common subject line for all emails from Storage Center in the Common Subject Line field. 6 Enter a Common Subject Line for all emails from Storage Center. 7 Check the Send Extended Hello (EHLO) field to configure use of extended hello for mail system compatibility. The Send with Hello (HELO) field is grayed out. When you select Extended Hello mode, instead of beginning the session with the HELO command, the receiving host issues the EHLO command. If the sending host accepts this command, the receiving host then sends it a list of SMTP extensions it understands, and the sending host then knows which SMTP extensions it can use to communicate with the receiving host. 8 If the email system requires the use of an authorized login, select the Use Authorized Login (AUTH LOGIN) checkbox and complete the Login ID and Password fields. 9 Click OK.

236

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

Configure iSNS Server iSNS is analogous to DNS. Just as DNS provides name service for servers and workstations in a LAN, an iSNS server provides name service for initiators and targets in a SAN. This makes the task of managing the storage network easier because data is centralized on a server. The iSNS protocol facilitates automated discovery, management, and configuration of iSCSI and Fibre Channel devices on a TCP/IP network. iSNS provides intelligent storage discovery and management services comparable to those found in Fibre Channel networks, allowing a commodity IP network to function in a similar capacity as a storage area network. iSNS also facilitates a seamless integration of IP and Fibre Channel networks, due to its ability to emulate Fibre Channel fabric services, and manage both iSCSI and Fibre Channel devices. Thereby, iSNS provides value in any storage network comprised of iSCSI devices, Fibre Channel devices, or any combination thereof. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Configure iSNS Server. The Configure iSNS Server dialog box appears.

2 Enter the IP address of the iSNS server. 3 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

237

Chapter 8 System Management

Configure Syslog Server All syslog messages have a logging facility, which is the location where messages are sent. The syslog daemon sends messages based on the configured facility. If no facility is specified, Local0 is the default outgoing facility. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Configure Syslog Server. The Configure SysLog Server dialog box appears.

2 Enter the IP address of the syslog server in the SysLog Server IP Address field. 3 From the drop-down menu, select the Syslog Facility to where the messages are sent. 4 Click OK.

238

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems Enterprise Manager manages data replications between Storage Centers. Use the System Setup menu to select the option to allow replications to be run. Note: Replications are managed in Enterprise Manager. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems. The Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems dialog box appears.

Note: By default, Asynchronous Replication is allowed for all systems. 2 To disallow Asynchronous remote replication, use the drop-down menu to set the Allowed field to Not Allowed. 3 Click OK to make the change.

Dell Compellent

239

Chapter 8 System Management

Submit a License If you add applications, or increase the number of disks licensed for your Storage Center, you may need to submit a new license. The license is emailed to you from your provider. Save the license file to a host system. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Submit a License. 2 Browse to the license file location. The file is indicated by a .lic extension. 3 Select the license file. Click Load License. System Manager notifies you if the license submission was successful.

Add a Controller The option to add controllers is a separately-licensed feature. Adding controllers increases fault tolerance and the ability to share the data load across controllers. All controllers in the dual-controller Storage Center must have the same physical connectivity to servers and storage enclosures to be able to share workload among them Caution: All configuration data is lost on the controller being added when the Add Controller command is accepted by the added controller. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Multi-Controller→ Add Controller to System. The Add Controller to System wizard starts.

This page allows you to add a controller to a single controller system. Adding a second controller to a system adds increased fault tolerance and the ability to divide system load across both controllers. To locate the Controller ID and IP Address right click on the system root node in the Explorer view and select the Properties option. 2 Enter Controller ID, which is the numeric serial number of the controller. 3 Enter a valid IP address in the IP address field for the Ether 0 (MGMT) Interface. 4 If you use a DNS server, enter the IP address of the DNS server in the Primary DNS Server field.

240

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Modifying System Properties

5 (Optional) Add the IP address of a second DNS server in the Secondary DNS Server field. 6 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 7 If everything is accurate, click Join Now. System Manager joins the controller. When the added controller is joined, Storage Center opens the Startup wizard. •

If there are iSCSI HBAs, continue with Configure iSCSI IO Cards on page 255.

•

If there are no iSCSI HBAs, continue with Configuring Local Ports on page 245.

Rebalance Local Ports When you add a controller, you must rebalance the local ports so that both controllers are actively managing data IO. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Multi-Controller→ Rebalance Ports. The Rebalance Local Ports wizard starts. 2 Click Continue to begin rebalancing local ports. Access is restricted while the rebalancing process is in progress.

Dell Compellent

241

Chapter 8 System Management

Finding Unmanaged Hardware When System Manager finds unmanaged hardware, the Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard alerts you to this condition and directs you to the appropriate wizard for the new hardware.

Manage Unassigned Disks Use the Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard to manage unassigned disks as described in these steps. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Find Unmanaged Hardware. The Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard starts. Note: To check for unmanaged hardware at startup, select the Check for unmanaged hardware on startup check box.

2 Click Manage Unassigned Disks. 3 Select the disk folder into which the disk should be placed and click Continue. 4 On the next page, select the disks to be included in the disk folder and click Continue. 5 On the next page, select the disks to be used as hot spares and click Continue. The next page displays the disk folder, hot spares, and disks in the disk folder you are modifying or creating, and attributes for each disk. Click Back to cycle through the previous pages to change hot spares or selected disks. 6 Click Add Disks Now to add the disks to the disk folder.

242

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Using Phone Home

Using Phone Home After installation and setup, initial configuration information for the Storage Center is sent (Phoned Home) to Dell Technical Support Services. Note: Phone Home is available to all Storage Center customers, but response time and assistance is based on the validity and level of your support contract.

Phone Home Immediately The Phone Home wizard can be used to initiate a Phone Home process and to view whether a Phone Home process is in progress. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Phone Home→ Phone Home. System Manager displays previous Phone Home events.

The State column describes the event status: •

Success: Phone Home was successful

•

Failure: Phone Home could not be completed.

•

Never Run: Depending upon Storage Center status, some items may not have been phoned home.

•

In Progress: Phone Home is currently occurring.

2 (Optional) Select the Include Detailed Logs check box to transfer extra debug logs with the phone home process. Note: Use this option only when requested by Dell Technical Support Services. 3 Click Phone Home Now. System Manager informs you that Phone Home is started.

Dell Compellent

243

Chapter 8 System Management

View the Phone Home Schedule Use the View menu to see the Phone Home schedule. From the View menu, select Scheduled Events.

Configure a Phone Home Proxy If you plan to use a proxy server in your network, configure the Phone Home proxy server using the Configure Phone Home Proxy wizard. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Phone Home→ Configure Phone Home Proxy. The Configure Phone Home Proxy wizard starts. 2 Select the Use Phone Home Proxy Server check box. 3 Enter the IP address of the proxy server, the port, user name, and password to be used when connecting to the proxy server. Confirm the password. 4 Click OK.

244

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Local Ports

Configuring Local Ports Ports must be configured before you can map volumes to servers. Modifying port configuration after volumes have been mapped to servers may cause those volumes to go offline. The operational mode of each transport type may be either Legacy Mode or Virtual Port Mode. Operational mode is selected for each transport type during initial setup. The Configure Local Ports wizard simplifies configuration and allows you to configure Legacy Mode and Virtual Port Mode local ports through a single wizard. From this wizard you can perform the following functions: •

View Current Local Port Configuration on page 245.

•

Edit a Fault Domain on page 250.

•

Edit Virtual Ports on page 252.

•

Reset Default Port Settings on page 253.

View Current Local Port Configuration Each port on the Storage Center controller is configured by transport type and for either front end or back end connectivity. The port information presented varies by operational mode and by transport type. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. The wizard displays tabs for each transport type (FC, iSCSI, and SAS) present on the Storage Center.

2 Click the tab for the transport type you want to view. Information displayed varies based on transport type and mode.

Dell Compellent

•

Status: Up or Down.

•

Slot/Port: Slot and port locations.

•

Magnifying glass icon: Click to open the Local Port Location dialog box that displays information about the port and shows a physical view of the IO cards.

•

Purpose: Values for port purpose vary by transport type and by operational mode.

•

Fault Domain: Allows you to change the Fault Domain or set to .

245

Chapter 8 System Management

•

World Wide Name: Unique identifier that identifies a particular FC, iSCSI, or SAS target.

•

User Alias: Allows you to define a descriptive, user-friendly names for physical ports. The defined name is displayed as the port name in System Manager.

•

Speed: Displays port speed.

•

Map Count: Displays the number of volumes that have been mapped to a server. Modifying port configuration after volumes have been mapped to servers may cause those volumes to go off-line. Not displayed for SAS ports.

•

Initiator Count: Number of remote ports with a role of initiator.

•

Target Count: Number of remote ports with a role of target. For FC and SAS, disks show up as targets.

•

Both Count: Number of ports that can both send and receive data, such as a second Storage Center acting as a server.

•

Enclosure Connected: Yes or No and is displayed only for FC ports in Virtual Port and Legacy Modes. Setting the value to Yes prevents the Configure Local Ports wizard from setting front-end values on FC ports attached to an enclosure.

•

Slot Type: PCI card type.

•

Operational Mode: Legacy Mode or Virtual Port Mode.

3 Click Assign Now to save any changes and close the wizard.

246

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Local Ports

About Fault Domains (FC and iSCSI only) Front-end ports are categorized into fault domains that identify allowed port movement when a controller or port fails. When working with fault domains, you should be aware of the following concepts.

Dual-controller Legacy Mode In Legacy Mode, ports are reserved for use in the event of a primary port failure. •

Primary ports are designated for data traffic.

•

Reserved ports assume data load transfer in the event of a failed primary port.

•

Reserved ports are also used for inter-process communication (IPC) traffic and Replication.

•

Fault domains group primary and reserved front-end ports to each other.

•

Primary and reserved ports are assigned the same fault domain ID (an arbitrary number) to designate where traffic will be moved in the event of a failover or rebalance.

Virtual Port Mode In Virtual Port Mode, all ports are available for IO. In the event of a port failure, IO traffic is routed to an operating port. •

A virtual port fault domain value is changed automatically when the preferred physical port fault domain is changed or when the virtual port is moved to a new preferred physical port. This greatly simplifies activities such as merging fault domains.

•

Front-end ports of the same transport type (iSCSI or FC) can be in a single fault domain. Caution: For iSCSI only, servers initiate IO to iSCSI ports through the fault domain’s control port. If an iSCSI port moves to a different fault domain, its control port will change. This change disrupts any service initiated through the previous control port. If an iSCSI port moves to a different fault domain, you must reconfigure the server-side iSCSI initiators before service can be resumed.

Dell Compellent

•

Although each virtual port is assigned a preferred physical port, in the event of any failure, a virtual port can fail over to another physical port within the fault domain.

•

With multi-pathing software on a server, volumes can be mapped to ports in more than one fault domain. To use multi-pathing, make sure that the server has software, such as MPIO, to manage multi-pathing.

•

To reduce network broadcast interference, configure Storage Center Ethernet and iSCSI ports into a separate VLAN.

247

Chapter 8 System Management

Create a Fault Domain Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to create a new fault domain. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts.

2 Click Edit Fault Domains. The Edit Fault Domains page appears.

3 Click Create Fault Domain.

248

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Local Ports

4 Enter a name for the new fault domain. 5 Select a connection type. 6 (Optional) Add notes. 7 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 8 Click Create Now.

Dell Compellent

249

Chapter 8 System Management

Edit a Fault Domain Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to edit fault domains. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts.

2 Click Edit Fault Domains. The Edit Fault Domains page appears.

3 Select a Fault Domain from the list. 4 Click Edit Fault Domain. The Fault Domain Properties wizard starts. 5 Enter a new domain name and optional notes for the domain. If the transport type is iSCSI, the Fault Domain Properties this page displays an IP Settings tab on which you can view and reset the IP address for the control port of the new iSCSI fault domain, net mask, gateway, and port number 6 Click OK.

250

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Local Ports

Delete a Fault Domain You can only delete a Fault Domain if it is not currently assigned to any ports. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts.

2 Click Edit Fault Domains. The Edit Fault Domains page appears.

3 Select a Fault Domain from the list. 4 Click Delete Domain. A confirmation prompt appears, or if the fault domain is in use, an error message appears. 5 If the domain is not in use, click OK to delete the domain. If the domain is in use, exit the Edit Fault Domains wizard, move affected ports to a different fault domain, and begin the procedure again.

Dell Compellent

251

Chapter 8 System Management

Edit Virtual Ports The Virtual Ports option appears on the first page of the Configure Local Ports wizard only if the Operational Mode is Virtual Port Mode and the transport type is FC or iSCSI, and only with a valid license for Virtual Ports. Use this option to modify the preferred physical port of a virtual port. When moving a virtual port to a different preferred physical port, the virtual port’s fault domain is automatically changed to reflect the fault domain of the new preferred physical port. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. 2 On the first page of the Configure Local Ports wizard, click Edit Virtual Ports. The next page opens.

3 Scroll to the right side of the page and select the preferred physical port from the dropdown menus. 4 Click Apply Changes to confirm your edits or Return to return to Configure Local Ports. 5 If the physical port of a virtual port does not match its preferred physical port, Storage Center controllers are in an Unbalanced state. Right-click on the Controllers node in the System Tree and select Rebalance Local Ports to open the Rebalance Local Ports wizard and rebalance the ports.

252

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Local Ports

Reset Default Port Settings Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to reset all port settings to the default values. Caution: Resetting the port configuration to default settings overrides existing port configurations and does not attempt to preserve the current connection state of servers attached to the Storage Center. This process may cause volumes to go offline. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. 2 Click Reset Defaults to generate the default port configuration for the selected transport. •

If no volumes are currently mapped by transport type, the wizard displays a warning and prompts you to confirm.

•

If volumes are currently mapped by transport type, the wizard prompts you to confirm.

3 Click Yes to reset and No the reject setting local ports back to their default values.

Dell Compellent

253

Chapter 8 System Management

Convert to Virtual Ports Before FC local ports can be converted to Virtual Port Mode, support for N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) Mode must be turned on for all front-end FC IO cards. Do this prior to converting to Virtual Port Mode to allow the FC IO cards to communicate with the switches and determine if NPIV is supported. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Virtual Ports→ Convert to Virtual Ports→ NPIV Mode On All FC IO Cards→ Turn On NVIP Mode. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm turning on NPIV Mode for front-end FC IO cards. 2 Click Yes. 3 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ VIrtual Ports→ Convert to Virtual Ports. The Convert to Virtual Ports wizard starts.

4 Select the transport types (FC or iSCSI) to convert to Virtual Ports. Note: By default, all transport types are selected. 5 Click Continue. The Storage Center checks to see if the selected transport types are eligible for converting.

254

•

If the conversion pre-check finds errors, an error message explaining the error is returned and the conversion process is canceled.

•

If no errors are found, a confirmation message is returned and the conversation process begins.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring Local Ports

Configure iSCSI IO Cards All iSCSI IO cards must be assigned static IP address, subnet mask, and gateway values before the IO cards can be used. The Configure iSCSI IO Cards wizard simplifies iSCSI IO card configuration by allowing you to configure cards through a single screen. If iSCSI cards were not configured as part of initial setup, use the wizard to configure both initialized and initialized cards. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Configure iSCSI IO Cards. The Configure iSCSI IO Cards wizard starts.

Note: Uninitialized cards display an IP Address of 0.0.0.0. 2 Enter IP address, subnet mask, and gateway values for all IO cards. 3 Click Save Configuration to configure the iSCSI IO card. A progress page appears showing configuration and port refresh progress. If any IO cards have not been configured, a warning message is displayed. Select Yes to leave the IO cards uninitialized. 4 When configuration is complete, the wizard closes automatically.

Dell Compellent

255

Chapter 8 System Management

Add iSCSI Remote Connections Use the Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard to set up IP addresses for remote connections. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. The Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard starts by asking if Network Address Translation (NAT) has been configured between the local Storage Center and the remote Storage Center. •

Click Yes if NAT is configured between the local Storage Center and the remote Storage Center. The next page of the wizard allows you to enter the required NATed IP addresses and iSCSI names for each iSCSI IO card in the remote Storage Center.

Note: Storage Center does not support Remote iSCSI Compellent Connections with NATed IP Addresses when either machine is running in Virtual Port mode. •

Click No if NAT is not configured between the local Storage Center and the remote Storage Center. The next page of the wizard allows you to enter the IP addresses.

2 Enter the required information and click Continue. The remote connections are added.

256

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing System Access

Managing System Access IP filtering creates access control lists either by user type or by a specific user. If you use IP filtering, you must use it to control all Storage Center access. IP filtering creates an Allow Access Control List. If there is no specific allow rule, access is denied. By default, IP filtering is off, implying an Allow Any rule. After you create an IP filter, Storage Center infers that no one has access except for the specific access granted in the IP filter. Make sure that the IP filters grant sufficient access to all System Manager users. Caution: Be careful when configuring IP Filters. If an IP Filter does not permit access to Admin users, it is possible to lock yourself out. If you use network address translation (NAT), be sure to specify the IP address that is seen by Storage Center. The address is not necessarily the same as the local IP address of the machine you use to access the Storage Center. In this case, the wizard will not be able to determine if an Access IP Filter exists for the current User Name and IP Address. Access menu options allow you to:

Dell Compellent

•

Create IP Filter for Current User on page 258

•

Create an IP Filter on page 259.

•

Configure the SNMP Server on page 262.

•

Configure a Secure Console on page 263.

•

Generate a New SSL Certificate on page 263.

•

Reset the License Acceptance on page 265.

257

Chapter 8 System Management

Create IP Filter for Current User Use this option to create an IP Filter for the current login and IP address. Changes take affect at the next login. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts.

System Manager notifies you if there is no filter for the current user name and IP address and warns you that you must include this information to have access at the next login. 2 Click Create Filter for this User on the first page of the Manage IP Filters wizard. A summary showing the IP filter that will be created for the current user name and IP address appears.

If you are using Network Address Translation (NAT), warnings appear cautioning you to use the address that is seen by the Storage Center 3 After you have double checked all information, click Create Now to create the access rule filter.

258

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing System Access

Create an IP Filter Use this option to create an IP Filter for a specific user or for all users. Changes take affect at the next login. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts. 2 Click Create IP Filter. A dialog box appears that allows you to set a privilege level for a group of users or for a specific user.

3 Choose from the following: •

Click User Privilege Level to select a privilege level for all users.

•

Click Specific User to select a privilege level for a specific user.

4 Click Continue. The next page that appears allows you to select a single host, an IP address, or a range of IP addresses for the filter.

Dell Compellent

259

Chapter 8 System Management

5 Make a selection for the IP filter. If single or range is selected, enter the associated IP address or range of IP addresses for the filter. 6 Click Continue. A summary appears showing the attributes of the filter you are about to create.

7 Click Create Now to finish creating the filter. A confirmation page appears displaying all current IP filter(s) including the newly created filter.

8 Click New Filter to create another filter, or click Close to finish.

260

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing System Access

Modify an IP Filter Use this option to change an IP Filter. Changes take affect at the next login. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts. 2 Click View Existing Filters. A dialog box appears listing the current filters. 3 Select a filter from the list, and select Modify Filter. 4 Modify the filter by selecting the user privilege level or the specific user, in the same way as for Create an IP Filter on page 259. 5 Click Continue. The IP address page appears. 6 Enter the IP address or the range of addresses. If a modification would disallow all access for the current user name and IP address, a warning message appears. 7 Verify all information and click Continue. A summary appears showing the attributes of the filter you are about to create. 8 Click Create Now to finish creating the filter. A confirmation page appears displaying all current IP filter(s) including the newly created filter. 9 Click Close to finish.

Delete an IP Filter Use this option to delete an IP Filter. Do not delete an IP filter that provides access for the current user ID and IP address. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts. 2 Click View Existing Filters. A dialog box appears listing the current filters. 3 Select a filter from the list, and select Delete Filter. If deletion of the selected filter would disallow all access for the current user name and IP address, a warning message appears. 4 Click Continue to delete the filter. 5 Click Close to finish.

Dell Compellent

261

Chapter 8 System Management

View Access Violations This report displays records of access failures to this Storage Center. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Access Violation Viewer. The Access Failures dialog box appears, which reports failures by: •

User Name

•

IP Address

•

Time

2 To remove an entry, select it from the list and click Remove.

Configure the SNMP Server The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) protocol monitors the Storage Center over the network. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ Configure SNMP Server. The Configure SNMP Server dialog box appears. 2 Enter a Read Only Community String. Enter a password used to allow Network Management Systems to read from the SNMP agent. 3 Enter a Read Write Community String. Enter a password used to allow Network Management Systems to read from or write to the SNMP agent. 4 Click Start Agent. The agent needs to be running for external SNMP-enabled devices to communicate with the SNMP Agent. 5 Enter Trap Community String. Enter a password used to allow SNMP agent to communicate with the Network Management System. 6 Enter a Trap Destination. Enter the IP address of the Network Management System that is collecting trap information. 7 Enter Trap Port. Enter the port number of the Network Management System. 8 Select a Trap Type from the drop-down menu. The trap type is used by the SNMP Agent to send trap data from the Network Management System. 9 Select or clear the Enable Deprecated Traps check box. This option is typically not enabled. Selecting this option causes the Storage Center SNMP Agent to send deprecated traps (organized by severity), as well as the more recently defined traps (organized by function). 10 Click Start Trap. 11 Click OK.

262

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing System Access

Configure a Secure Console A secure console allows support personnel to access a Storage Center console using SSH without connecting through the serial port. Note: Do not modify the secure console configuration without the assistance of Dell Technical Support Services. A machine used as a proxy server for Phone Home cannot be dependent upon Storage Center itself. If a proxy server is dependent on Storage Center, the machine cannot Phone Home or connect through SSH as it is booting. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Access→Configure Secure Console. System Manager warns you not to modify the secure console without the assistance of Dell Technical Support Services. 2 If you are being assisted by Dell Technical Support Services, click Continue. The Configure Secure Console wizard starts. 3 For additional information, contact Dell Technical Support Services.

Disable Secure Console Access If secure console access was enabled through the Configure Secure Console wizard, options to restart or disable secure console access to the Storage Center are available on the Storage Management→ System→ Access menu. •

From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ Disable Secure Console.

Restart Secure Console Access If secure console access was enabled through the Configure Secure Console wizard, options to restart or disable secure console access to the Storage Center are available on the Storage Management→ System→ Access menu. •

From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ Restart Secure Console.

Generate a New SSL Certificate The SSL certificate must match the Storage Center's IP Address or DNS host name. The initial certificate shipped with the Storage Center will have a common name that may not match the IP address or DNS host name assigned to the Storage Center. If this is the case, when connecting to Storage Center, a message will be displayed identifying a mismatch between the IP address or DNS host name in the certificate and the IP address or DNS host name of the Storage Center. Import the correct certificate or generate a new certificate to correct this.

Generate SSL at Startup If prompted, enter the IP Address or DNS name of Storage Center as you refer to it in your browser. You may include a list of names and IP addresses separated by commas. The first name will become the Common Name, and the rest of the names will become subjectAltNames in the certificate. Storage Center generates a new certificate set with this IP Address or DNS name, correcting the mismatch. This command closes the current connection. You must log on again after the new certificate is generated.

Dell Compellent

263

Chapter 8 System Management

Import an Existing Certificate Use the Generate New SSL Certificate wizard to import an existing certificate. The existing certificate must be a public key file (*.pem) file and must be in x.509 format 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ Manage SSL Certificate. The Manage SSL Certificate wizard starts. 2 Click Import.

3 Navigate to and select the existing public key (*.pem) file. The public key file must be in x.509 format. 4 Click Next. 5 Navigate to and select the existing private key file (*.pem). 6 Click Next. A summary page appears that identifies the key files selected. 7 Click Save to import the certificates.

264

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing System Access

Generate SSL Using System Manager Use the Generate New SSL Certificate wizard to generate a new certificate. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ Manage SSL Certificate. The Manage SSL Certificate wizard starts. Caution: Generating a new certificate will close the current connection. You will have to close your web browser windows to continue. 2 Click Generate to create and install the new certificates. 3 Enter the IP Address or DNS name of Storage Center as you refer to it in your browser. You may include a list of names and IP addresses separated by commas. The first name will become the Common Name, and the rest of the names will become subjectAltNames in the certificate. 4 Click Generate Now. Storage Center generates a new certificate set with this IP Address or DNS name, correcting the mismatch. This command closes the current connection. You must log on again after the new certificate is generated.

Reset the License Acceptance Follow these steps to reset the license acceptance. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ Reset License Acceptance. The Reset License Acceptance dialog box opens. 2 Click Yes (Reset Now).

Dell Compellent

265

Chapter 8 System Management

Updating Storage Center Software Storage Center updates are bundled together as a single downloadable update package. An update package includes the latest updates for the following Storage Center software and firmware: •

Storage Center System Manager software

•

Storage Center firmware

•

Enclosure firmware

•

Disk firmware

Types of Components Within an update package, an individual update component is classified by how the update component can be installed. •

Required or Deferrable: Required components must be installed as part of the update. Deferrable components can be installed at a later time.

•

Service Affecting or Service Optional: Service Affecting components can be installed only when the Storage Center is temporarily taken out-of-service. Service Optional components can be installed either when the Storage Center is in service or during a scheduled outage.

The following table shows which components affect service during installation. Service Affecting

Service Optional

Storage Center with a Single Controller Storage Center Firmware Update

Yes

Enclosure Firmware Update

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Depending on the components for a specific release, enclosure firmware may or may not be Service Optional. Disk Firmware Update Disk firmware upgrades may be service affecting or non-service affecting depending on the drive. A drive that supports an in-service upgrade, is a drive that can:

266

•

Process IOs and other commands while receiving firmware blocks.

•

Boot and ready new firmware in three seconds.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Updating Storage Center Software

Service Affecting

Service Optional

Storage Center with Dual Controllers Storage Center Firmware Update Enclosure Firmware Update

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Depending on the components for a specific release, enclosure firmware may or may not be Service Optional. Disk Firmware Update Disk firmware upgrades may be service affecting or non-service affecting depending on the drive. A drive that supports an in-service upgrade, is a drive that can:

Dell Compellent

•

Process IOs and other commands while receiving firmware blocks.

•

Boot and ready new firmware in three seconds.

267

Chapter 8 System Management

Check for an Update Package By default, a new Storage Center is configured to automatically check for update packages. An upgraded Storage Center retains the existing configuration setting for automatic updates. However, you can manually check for updates by using the Check for Updates menu option. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Update→ Check for Update. 2 Click Check Now. When Storage Center is finished checking for updates, the system displays the current status of the update process. It also provides links to all the operations needed to check for, download, verify, and install Storage Center updates. The links provided depend upon the status of the update process.

Update Status Messages The following table for provides details on possible messages in Update Status display.

268

Field

Description

Current Update Status

Current status of the Check Update, Download Update, or Install Update process: •

Checking for Update: Storage Center is currently checking for updates.

•

Controller Down: A controller is down. Installation cannot proceed when a controller is down.

•

Downloading Update: Storage Center is currently downloading an update.

•

Error Checking or Downloading: An error occurred during Check Update or Download Update.

•

Error Installing Update: An error occurred while installing an update component. Click Install Report to view details on the installation error.

•

Installing Update: Storage Center is currently installing an update.

•

No Updates Available: Last Check Update process found no available updates. Click Check Now to check again for updates.

•

Update Available for Download: An update is available for download. Click Download Now to download the update.

•

Update Ready to Install: A downloaded update is ready to install. Click Install Update to install the update.

•

Validating Components: Storage Center is currently verifying each component status to determine if a component is ready for installation.

Current Package Version

OS version currently running on the Storage Center.

New Package Version

Version of the OS ready to download or install.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Updating Storage Center Software

Field

Description

Service Affecting

Indicates whether package installation affects Storage Center service:

Controller Reset

•

Yes: Package installation affects Storage Center service.

•

No: Package installation does not affect Storage Center service.

•

Deferrable: Package contains service-affecting components that can be installed at a later time.

Indicates whether the update package installation requires rebooting the controllers: •

For a single-controller Storage Center: rebooting the controller always affects service.

•

For a clustered-controller Storage Center: If the upgrade is service-affecting, the controllers are rebooted simultaneously. If the upgrade is not service-affecting, the controllers are rebooted in sequence.

Last Check Time

Shows the date and time when Storage Center last successfully checked for updates.

Validation Errors

Shows the number of validation warnings or errors, if any, encountered during a Validate update process.

Installation Errors

Shows the number of installation errors and warnings, if any, that occurred during installation.

Update Status Actions Depending on the reported status, the following buttons appear: Click …

To …

Check Now

Check for updates.

Validate Components

Validate update components.

Install Update

Install the downloaded update package.

Details

View details for a downloaded update package.

See Also Configure Automatic Updates on page 270

Dell Compellent

269

Chapter 8 System Management

Manually Download an Available Update You can check for and download software updates at any time. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Update→ Update Status. The Update Status wizard starts. 2 Depending on the status of the currently software, you can: •

Click Download Now. To download the latest update software package. As Storage Center downloads the update, status appears in the Update Status wizard.

•

Select Check Now to check for updates. When Storage Center is finished checking for updates, the results are displayed in the Update Status dialog box.

Configure Automatic Updates You can set up Storage Center to automatically download software updates. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Update → Configure Automatic Updates. The Configure Automatic Updates wizard starts. 2 Select the update option: •

Do not automatically check for software updates: Select this option to disable automatic checking for updates.

•

Notify me of a software update but do not download automatically: Select to automatically check for updates and receive notification when an update is available. Updates are not downloaded until you explicitly download the update.

•

Download software updates automatically and notify me: Select to automatically download updates and receive notification when the download is complete.

•

Never check for software updates (Phone Home not available): Select to prevent System Manager from ever checking for updates either automatically or manually. This option is for secure sites at which Phone Home is not available.

3 Click OK.

270

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Updating Storage Center Software

View Update Package Details When a downloaded update package is ready to install, you can view details for the package prior to installing the package. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Update→ Update Status. The Update Status wizard starts. 2 Click Details. The Update Details page appears. The Update Details page provide details for all components included in the update package. Column

Description

Component

Name of component to be updated.

Type

Storage Center: Component updates Storage Center software.

•

Enclosure: Component updates enclosure firmware.

•

Disk: Component updates disk firmware.

Version

Version number of the update component.

Status

Status of the component update: •

Ready for Update: Component is ready for update.

•

Installed: Component has been installed.

Update Count

Number of components on the Storage Center to which the update component applies. For example, for a controller firmware update, shows 1 for a single-controller Storage Center and 2 for a dualcontroller Storage Center.

Update Type

Indicates whether the installation of the update component is required or deferrable:

Message

Dell Compellent

Type of component to be updated: •

•

Required: Update must be applied.

•

Deferrable Service Affecting: Update is deferrable and applying the update affects service on all systems. Schedule a service outage to apply the update.

•

Deferrable Service Optional: Update is deferrable and applying the update can be done either without affecting service or during a scheduled service outage.

Shows information messages, if any, that further describe the update component.

271

Chapter 8 System Management

Decide How to Apply Updates Within an update package, an individual update component is classified by how the update component can be installed. 1 After downloading an update packages, view the Update Details: a From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Update→ Update Status. The Update Status wizard starts. b Click Details. The Update Details page appears. 2 On the Update Details page, view the Update Type column for each component: For this Update Type … Apply Update Options Include … Required

Deferrable Service Affecting

Component must be installed. •

For a single-controller Storage Center, the update component affects service.

•

For a dual-controller Storage Center, the update component can be performed without disruption of service.

Component installation can be deferred. Applying the update affects service on all Storage Centers. Schedule a service outage to apply the update.

Deferrable Service Optional

Component installation can be deferred. Applying the update can be done either without affecting service or during a scheduled service outage.

3 After viewing the Update Type for all components included in the update package, determine how to apply the updates: •

If you intend to install components that affect service, plan for and schedule a service outage during which to apply the updates. You may also want to install components that are service optional during the schedule outage.

•

If you intend to install components that do not affect service, plan for applying the updates during a time at which the Storage Center is least busy.

Before installing an upgrade, you should be aware of the following: •

The installation process automatically reboots Storage Center controller(s) when required by the components being updated.

•

Disk firmware, when applied in-service, does not require a system boot.

•

For dual-controller Storage Centers, installation reboots the controllers in sequence or simultaneously, depending on the components being updated. A service outage is required when controllers are rebooted simultaneously. Note: Do not manually restart the Storage Center controllers during the upgrade process. Upgrading is a software-controlled process.

272

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Restarting Storage Center

Restarting Storage Center These steps describe how to restart a controller using the System Manager. Use this method to restart controllers without shutting down the entire Storage Center. 1 From the from the Storage Management menu, select System→ Shutdown/Restart. 2 For a dual-controller configuration, select Restart in Sequence or Restart Simultaneously. •

Restart in Sequence does not cause an outage. System Manager shuts down the first controller, and then restarts the first controller. When the first controller is up, System Manager shuts down and restarts the second controller. When both controllers are running again, ports are unbalanced and System Manager asks you to re-balance the ports.

•

Restart Simultaneously shuts both controllers down simultaneously and then brings them back on line. This causes an outage. When the controllers are restarted, they may or may not be unbalanced.

3 Click OK. Note: If the controllers fail to power down, hold down the physical power button on the front of the controller until it powers off (approximately 8 seconds).

Dell Compellent

273

Chapter 8 System Management

Shutting Down Storage Center Shutting down a Storage Center creates a system outage, during which time no IO is processed. Always halt all IO to the controllers before shutting down a Storage Center. Use this process only as directed, for example to replace hardware, to move the Storage Center to another location, or to shut down for data center power maintenance. Storage Center should be always be shut down in an orderly process by turning off controllers and all associated components in the order described in this section.

Prepare to Shut Down Storage Center Before shutting down Storage Center hardware, Phone Home current information, disable cache settings, and stop all IO as described in these steps. 1 Phone Home to Dell Technical Support Services. a From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Phone Home→ Phone Home. The System Manager displays previous Phone Home events. b Click Phone Home Now. The Phone Home wizard starts. c Click OK. For each item being sent, the Phone Home wizard shows the status of In Progress. Once completed, this status changes to Success if the Phone Home has completed successfully, or Failure if the Phone Home could not be completed. d When all items have been sent successfully, click Close. 2 Disable the global system cache settings to flush all cached data to disk. a From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. b Click the Cache tab. c Clear the Enable Read Cache and Enable Write Cache check boxes d Click OK. 3 Shut down all attached servers so that all IO is completely stopped. See Also Set System Cache on page 231 Using Phone Home on page 243

274

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Shutting Down Storage Center

Shut Down Controllers Use the System Manager to shut down controllers in the Storage Center. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Shutdown/Restart. The Shutdown/Restart wizard starts.

2 Select Shutdown from the drop-down menu. 3 Click OK. Both controllers shut down, causing a system outage. Note: If the controllers do not shut down, press and hold the power button on the front of each controller unit they turn off (about five seconds).

Shut Down Enclosures Each enclosure has two power supplies, which must physically be turned off. Press each power switch on the rear of the enclosure. When possible, turn off the power supplies simultaneously.

Dell Compellent

275

Chapter 8 System Management

Starting Storage Center These steps describe how to start a Storage Center that has been completely shut down.

Turn on Enclosures Turn on each enclosure attached to the Storage Center and allow the disks to spin up to full speed before turning on other enclosures and the controllers. 1 Simultaneously press both power switches on the rear of the enclosure to turn on the enclosure. 2 Repeat with each enclosure attached to the Storage Center, waiting for the disks to spin up between enclosures.

Turn on Controllers Turn on each controller and then log on System Manager to finish the controller start up process. Prerequisites Make sure that all disks are up and spinning at full speed before turning on any controllers. Steps 1 Turn on each controller by pressing and holding the power button on the front of the controller. The fans turn on as an indication that the controller is starting to come up. 2 After the controllers have finished booting, log on to the Storage Center using System Manager. 3 For dual-controller systems, respond Yes to the prompt to rebalance local ports. If the prompt does not appear, follow these steps to rebalance local ports. a Right-click on the Controllers node in the System Tree and select Rebalance Local Ports. The Rebalance Local Ports wizard starts. b Click Continue to begin rebalancing local ports.

Finish Startup After the controllers are running and ports are balanced, reset the cache settings, resume IO, and finish by Phoning Home. 1 Enable the global system cache settings. a From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Properties. b Click the Cache tab. c Select both Enable Read Cache and Enable Write Cache check boxes. d Click OK. 2 Resume IO by turning on all servers that use the Storage Center. 3 Make sure all hosts are back online and verify all volumes are mapped to the Storage Center. 4 Phone Home from Storage Center to Dell Technical Support Services.

276

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Online Storage Summary

Viewing Online Storage Summary The Online Storage tab displays various storage summaries, trends, and reports.

View Available Storage Summary The Available Storage Summary tab displays disk space usage for each disk folder. 1 From the Storage Center View menu, select Online Storage. 2 Select Available Storage Summary. The Available Storage Summary is displayed in the main pane.

Dell Compellent

Field

Description

Status

Indication if you need to add storage — may be Normal or Disk Low.

Total disk space

Total space for each disk folder. Generally there is only one disk folder. Total Disk Space displays the sum of all disk drives in each disk folder. A disk folder is a logical grouping of physical drives with similar page sizes and redundancy. Disk folders can contain a mixture of drive types, capacities, and speeds. The total capacity of the disk folder is the sum of the capacities of the drives within the folder. Disk folders also contain spare drives, reserved to replaced a failed drive. Because space on a spare drive is not used until another drive fails, its capacity is not included in the total capacity for the disk folder.

Total space allocated for volume use

Total space minus overhead.

Allocated space used by volumes

Storage Center allocates disk space based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. As more space is used, Storage Center allocates additional space. When Storage Center has no more space to allocate, it sends an alert.

277

Chapter 8 System Management

Field

Description

Free allocated space

Storage Center allocates disk space based on the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. As more space is used, Storage Center allocates additional space. When Storage Center has no more space to allocate, it sends an alert.

Unallocated disk space

Space not allocated, not used.

Total free space

Total of Free allocated space and Unallocated disk space.

Space reserved by system

Space reserved for system overhead.

Unhealthy/Bad disk space

Number of unusable bad disk sectors on disks, if any.

Spares and space available

Number and capacity of spares, if any.

Number of unmanaged disks Number of unmanaged disks, if any.

278

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Online Storage Summary

View Storage Consumption Trends The Storage Consumption Trends report displays the history of storage consumption for each disk folder and each class of disk. The trends indicate which disks are getting increased use. Storage trends by disk class can help you decide which disks to add if a Storage Center needs additional space. 1 From the View menu, select Online Storage. 2 Click the Storage Consumption Trends tab. The Storage Consumption Trends are displayed in the main pane, showing consumption by disk folder and disk class.

Dell Compellent

279

Chapter 8 System Management

View Data Progression Pressure Reports Use the Data Progression Pressure Report to make decisions about the types of disks to add to a Storage Center. For each storage type, the Data Progression Pressure Reports displays how space is allocated and consumed across different RAID types and storage tiers. By default, Storage Center using Data Progression gradually migrates data down from high-end drives to be stored on low-end drives. If a disk class is full, Storage Center writes data to the next lower class. Using Storage Profiles, you can create volumes that reside only on one disk class. For example, a volume that contains only Replays might be stored on a lower disk tier. Data Progression Pressure Reports can display data from the previous 30 days so that you can see how Data Progression has moved data between RAID types and disk tiers. 1 From the View menu, select Online Storage. 2 Click the Data Progression Pressure Reports tab. 3 Select a date and time in the Sample Time drown-down menu.

The Data Progression Pressure Report displays: •

Space available in a disk folder. Disk folders cannot share space.

•

Space allocated to this type of storage.

•

Total space allocated across all types of storage.

For each tier, the Data Progression Pressure Report displays:

280

•

Space available in tier.

•

Space allocated to this type of storage.

•

Total space allocated from this tier across all types of storage.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Online Storage Summary

Click on a column head to sort data in that column. Within each tier, the Data Progression Pressure Report information includes:

Dell Compellent

Field

Description

RAID Level

Level in the tier.

Track

Type of track — may be Fast or Standard.

Chart

Bar chart displaying allocated space and space consumed.

Disk Allocated

Space reserved for volumes.

Disk Used

From the amount allocated, the amount that is in use by volumes.

Moving Up

In the next Data Progression cycle, the amount that will be moved up. Indicated in the bar chart by a green bar and up arrow.

Moving Down

In the next data progression cycle, the amount that will be moved down. Indicated in the bar chart by an orange bar and a down arrow.

Volume Allocated

Amount of space presented for the use by volumes after RAID is applied.

Volume Used

Amount of space used by volumes after RAID is applied.

Saved as RAID 10

Amount of space saved by moving less-accessed data to RAID 5 rather than using RAID 10 for all data.

281

Chapter 8 System Management

View Volume Distribution Reports Volume Distribution Reports display the amount of storage space each volume is consuming. Information includes space allocated for a volume and the amount of space actually consumed. The volume distribution report can help you recover space by identifying logical and physical space. 1 From the View menu, select Online Storage. 2 Click the Volume Distribution Report tab. The Volume Distribution Report is displayed in the main pane.

The Volume Distribution Report displays logical space consumed by a volume and additional space this volume is consuming because of the existence of Replays. It details growth rate trends for both the volume and the associated Replays. Because Replays contain information about changes that occurred on a volume over time, they take up space. For example, a volume and all of its Replays might consume 10 GB of space. If all the Replays were expired, the volume would only consume 8 GB of space. In this case, the Replay overhead is 2 GB. In addition, the Online Storage view also has reports for:

282

•

Available Storage Summary

•

Storage Consumption Trends

•

Data Progression Pressure Reports

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Viewing Background Processes

Viewing Background Processes Many Storage Center tasks, such as Replications, run as background processes. Monitor and manage these processes from the Background Processes view. From the View menu, select Background Processes. Background processes information appears.

Viewing the System Log The System Log is a record of all status messages from the Storage Center. 1 From the View menu, select System Log. The Filter Log Messages wizard starts. 2 Use the drop-down menus to filter the content of the log to be retrieved. Select from the following: •

Date and time between which to view logs

•

Message level greater than, lesser than, or equal to a warning, configuration, or debug

•

In a clustered-controller configuration, name of controller

•

Subsystem

3 Select or clear the check box to display system-level messages. 4 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

283

Chapter 8 System Management

Responding to the Alert Monitor Alerts warn you when Storage Center requires attention. The current status of the Storage Center is indicated by the color of the System Status icon in the top-right corner of System Manager.

Alert Indicators Alerts occur in various types depending upon the area of the Storage Center affected. The type of the alert is indicated by the icon that appears before the alert message. •

Red (Critical): The System Status icon is red when an alert exists that has a status of Down, Critical, or Emergency. When the System Status icon is red, this indicates a condition that requires immediate attention.

•

Yellow (Warning): The System Status icon is yellow when an alert exists that has a status of Degraded or Unavailable. This indicates a condition of which you should be aware, but which does not require immediate attention.

•

Green (Normal): The System Status icon is green when no alerts exist, when the only alerts that exist are to inform you. The System Status icon returns to green when all alerts higher than Inform are acknowledged.

Alert Categories Alert

Description

Alert

This category contains normal alerts. These alerts represent current issues present on the Storage Center. They are also being actively monitored and will clear themselves automatically should the situation that has caused them corrects itself. After an alert of this type becomes cleared, a record that it occurred can be found under the Alert History category.

History

This category contains a history of the normal alerts that appeared and were cleared automatically. This category exists to allow you to keep a record of any past conditions that have occurred on the Storage Center.

Indication

This category contains alerts that are for informational purposes only. These alerts exist to warn you about a condition on the Storage Center that may require direct user intervention to correct.

Maintenance

This category contains any alerts that occur while the Storage Center's Operation Mode is set to Install, Maintenance, or PreProduction. This category exists to isolate these alerts from alerts that occur during normal operation.

Alert Status

284

Status

Description

Complete

Indicates that an operation on the Storage Center has completed.

Critical

Indicates an item on the Storage Center is in a critical state and may be nearing failure.

Degraded

Indicates an item on the Storage Center is currently operating in a degraded mode. Items in this condition may operate in degraded mode indefinitely, but are not functioning to their full capability.

Down

Indicates an item on the Storage Center is down and not currently operational.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Responding to the Alert Monitor

Status

Description

Emergency

Indicates an item on the Storage Center requires immediate attention in order to remain operational.

Inform

Provide information regarding some operation that is occurring or has occurred on the Storage Center.

Unavailable

Indicates that an item on the Storage Center that is expected to be present cannot currently be found for use.

View the System Alert Monitor The Alert Monitor opens in a separate tab in the main window. 1 Click System Status at the top of the System Explorer. The Alert Monitor view appears. 2 Expand the Alerts folder to view all alerts.

3 Select an alert to display additional information about the message. The shortcut menu displays additional commands for the alert. •

For example, Show displays the object. Some alerts do not have a related object to be shown. For these alerts, the Object column is blank.

•

To acknowledge an alert, select Acknowledge. Acknowledging an alert acknowledges it for all users.

•

Properties displays additional information. Click the Advanced tab in Alert Properties to display a reference number. The reference number may be important for communication with Dell Technical Support Services.

Acknowledged Alerts Alerts in the Alert and Maintenance categories can be acknowledged to indicate to the Storage Center that you have read the alert message and are aware of the problem. After all alerts have been acknowledged, the System Status icon returns to the green (normal) state until additional alerts occur.

Alert Deletion Alerts in the Indication and Alert History categories can be deleted. After an alert is deleted, it cannot be recovered.

Dell Compellent

285

Chapter 8 System Management

Finding More Information About an Alert Many alerts are associated with items that can be monitored in other areas of the System Manager software. These items are displayed in the Object column. To see more information about one of these objects, select the alert and then select the Show button in the Alert Monitor toolbar.

Space Warnings If remaining free disk space reaches 32 GB or less, Storage Center begins a series of steps to conserve space, to alert you of the status, and to finally enter emergency mode if disk space is not added.

Conservation Mode Storage Center enters Conservation Mode when remaining free space reaches 32 GB (or less for systems smaller than 3.2 TB). When Storage Center enters Conservation Mode, System Manager generates a Conservation Mode Alert to inform you that the no new volumes can be created and that it will begin to aggressively expire Replays. The Conservation Alert is close to the boundary where space is exhausted to keep these actions from being performed unless necessary. Because of its proximity to the emergency threshold, it is not a tool to manage storage, and should not be used to plan adding disks to the Storage Center.

Emergency Mode Storage Center enters Emergency Mode when the system can no longer operate because there is no more free space. In Emergency Mode, System Manager responds with the following actions. •

Generates an Emergency alert.

•

Expires Replays early.

•

Prevents new volume creation.

•

Restricts write IO to pages already allocated; that is, only re-writes of existing data are allowed.

To support recovery efforts, these functions remain available: •

Volumes remain visible as read-only.

•

Volumes can respond to Space Recovery requests from the server or Enterprise Manager to release unused blocks of data. Caution: Because Emergency Mode prevents all server IO outside of existing data updates, Emergency Mode is service affecting. Administrators must take special care to continually monitor free space on the Storage Center and add space when needed to avoid reaching the Emergency Mode threshold.

286

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Monitoring Storage Space

Monitoring Storage Space Storage Center sends an alert when additional space is required. The Storage Center: •

Automatically monitors the amount of space used and the amount of space remaining on a Storage Center, both as a percentage of space and an absolute value

•

Automatically allocates disk space for volumes to use as needed

•

Notifies you when remaining free space falls below the Storage Alert Threshold

Storage Center groups all disks in a managed Disk Folder into one common pool of storage. Volumes draw space from the common pool. Each volume simultaneously uses all of the disk drives in the shared storage pool for improved data access rates.

Servers

Volumes

Managed Disk Folder pool of storage

An exception to the efficient pool of storage is created when disks are assigned to a second managed disk folder or volumes are created with non-standard datapage sizes or redundancy. To take full advantage of Dynamic Capacity, assign all disks to one managed disk folder using standard storage type volumes. Space is allocated from the shared storage pool as new volumes are created, additional data is stored on volumes, and Replays are taken and stored.

Dell Compellent

287

Chapter 8 System Management

Changing the Storage Alert Threshold The Low Space Threshold is the percentage of available storage below which System Manager alerts you to add more disks. By default, the Storage Alert Threshold is set at 10% of available storage. Storage Center allocates disk space from a disk folder for volume and replay use as needed based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. As the Storage Center approaches the end of the disk space available within the disk folder, you are notified of the possibility that you could run out of space. This notification indicates that you are in a Space Low state. The notification occurs when space available falls below the Storage Alert Threshold. 1 From an assigned disk folder shortcut menu, select Properties. (Your assigned disk folder may have a different name.) The Disk Folder Properties dialog box appears.

2 Select a Storage Alert Threshold from the drop-down menu. If available storage space falls below this number, an alert is generated to warn you that space is low.

288

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Adding Space

Adding Space The long term solution for increasing available space is to add disks to Storage Center. The list below includes additional actions for recovering unused disk space. •

Adding Disks The solution to insufficient storage is to add disks or enclosures. After disks are added, the space may not be immediately available. Make sure that you allow enough time for the System Manager to prepare disks to be used to store data.

•

Deleting Unused Volumes Delete unused volumes. (An unused volume is not an empty volume.)

•

Emptying the Recycle Bin Make sure that the Recycle Bin is empty. Space from deleted volumes is not recovered until the Recycle Bin is empty. Select the Recycle Bin. From the shortcut menu, select Empty Recycle Bin.

•

Expiring Replays Expire Replays that are not needed. Select each volume separately, and expire Replays from the Replay tab.

•

Using the Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery Program The Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery program finds and recovers unused disk space. For more information, see the Enterprise Manager User Guide.

See Also Delete a Volume on page 38 Managing Disks on page 195

Dell Compellent

289

Chapter 8 System Management

User Interface Reference for System Properties This section provides a description of the System Properties options.

System Properties General Tab Use the General tab to enter the Storage Center name and IP addresses and to set the operation mode.

Field

Description

Name

Name the Storage Center

Type

Object type

Storage Center ID

Typically the licensed controller number

Management IP Address (IPv4)

Used for dual-controller configurations to run the System Manager software. This IP address is always connected to the leader.

Management IP Address (IPv6)

Optional address using IPv6 address.

Management IP Prefix (IPv6) Prefix required when using IPv6 address. This is set in the controller properties and displayed for information only. Operation Mode

Can be set to Normal, Maintenance, Install, PreProduction

See Also Modifying System Properties on page 226 Rename the Storage Center on page 226 Set the System Management IP Address on page 227

290

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for System Properties

System Properties Storage Tab Use the Storage tab to change the stripe width for RAID storage. Modifying this setting changes how data is distributed across the drives. Distributing data across more drives is marginally more efficient, but increases vulnerability. Distributing data across fewer drives is less efficient, but marginally decreases vulnerability

Field

Description

RAID 5 Stripe Width 5 Wide (80% Efficient)

RAID 5-5 distributes parity blocks across five drives

9 Wide (89% Efficient)

RAID 5-9 distributes parity blocks across nine drives.

RAID 6 Stripe Width 6 Wide (67% Efficient)

RAID 6-6 distributes parity blocks across six drives

10 Wide (80% Efficient)

RAID 6-10 distributes parity blocks across 10 drives

See Also Select RAID Stripe Width on page 228

Dell Compellent

291

Chapter 8 System Management

System Properties Data Progression Tab Data Progression is a separately licensed application program. To see if your Storage Center includes Data Progression, click the Help icon at the top of the main pane. Use the Data Progression tab to set the time and duration for Data Progression to run.

Field

Description

Everyday at

Allows you to set the time of day to run Data Progression

Maximum Run Time

Set the amount of time for running Data Progression

See Also About Data Progression on page 229 Schedule Data Progression on page 229 Determine if Data Progression is Running on page 230 Stop Data Progression on page 230

292

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for System Properties

System Properties Cache Tab Use the Cache tab to enable or disable read and write cache. For example, if you are planning to upgrade a controller in Storage Center, you may be instructed to disable Write Cache in order to stop activity to the cache card prior to shutting down the controller.

Field

Description

Enable Read Cache

Select or clear the check box to enable or disable read cache. Current status is given below the selection

Enable Write Cache

Select or clear the check box to enable or disable write cache. Current status is given below the selection

See Also Set System Cache on page 231

Dell Compellent

293

Chapter 8 System Management

System Properties Disk Sparing Tab Use the Disk Sparing tab to set the spare disk requirements.

Field

Description

Default Number of Spares Per Enclosure

Number of disks to be used as hot spares in disk folders.

Minimum Disks Per Enclosure Before Auto Sparing

Number of disks to allow before automatically setting up hot spares.

See Also Configure Global Disk Spares on page 232

294

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for System Properties

System Properties Message Tab Use the Message tab to add a login message such as usage guidelines or user requirements.

See Also Add a Login Message on page 233

Dell Compellent

295

Chapter 8 System Management

System Properties Info Tab Use the Info tab to insert notes about the Storage Center.

See Also Add Optional Information about Storage Center on page 234

296

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

9

Users and User Groups This chapter describes how to manage access to Storage Center and configure user volume defaults.

Contents Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Enabling Directory Services Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Configuring User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Managing User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 User Interface Reference for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Dell Compellent

297

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication Users have access to folders, volumes, views, and commands depending on their privilege level and the User Groups to which they belong. User accounts can be created locally and/ or exist externally in a directory service.

User Privilege Levels Each user is assigned a single privilege level. Storage Center has three levels of user privilege: •

Administrator Administrators have read and write access to the entire Storage Center — there are no restrictions on their access. All Administrators have the same pre-defined privileges. Only Administrators can manage Users and User Groups.

•

Volume Managers Volume Managers have access to the folders associated with their assigned User Groups. They can create volumes in the allowed volume folders and map them to existing servers in the allowed server folders.

•

Reporters Reporters have read-only access to the folders associated with their assigned User Groups.

User Groups Volume, server, and disk folder access for Volume Managers and Reporters is granted through the User Groups to which the user is assigned. Administrators have access to all folders and do not have an assigned User Group. •

•

For Volume Managers, User Groups restrict: •

Access to volume, server, and disk folders

•

Default values used when a Volume Manager creates a volume

For Reporters, User Groups restrict access to volume, server, and disk folders.

User Groups can give a Volume Manager or Reporter the impression that they are the only users of the Storage Center. These users can see only the volume, server, and disk folders made available to them. The User Groups to which a user has access appear in the main pane of the System Explorer.

User Account Management and Authentication You can grant access to Storage Center using either of the following methods: •

Create local Storage Center users User accounts can be created and maintained using System Manager. Local users are managed in the Users node in the System Tree.

•

Configure Storage Center to authenticate users in an external directory service In environments that use Active Directory or OpenLDAP, you can configure Storage Center to authenticate directory users. Access can be granted to individual directory users and directory user groups. These users log on to System Manager using their username/password domain credentials.

298

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Understanding Users, User Groups, and Authentication

Similar to local users, directory users are managed in the Users node in the System Tree. You cannot simultaneously configure Storage Center to use Active Directory and OpenLDAP. However, local accounts can be used regardless of your external environment. Caution: Dell Compellent recommends enabling at least one local user with Administrator privileges when using directory services. This account can be used to manage Storage Center in the event that the Active Directory/ OpenLDAP servers are inaccessible and directory users cannot be authenticated.

Configuration Requirements for External Directory Services Configuring Storage Center to use Active Directory or OpenLDAP authentication is a twopart process: •

Enable directory services authentication. If you configure Active Directory, you must also join the controller to the domain.

•

Grant directory users and directory user groups access to Storage Center.

Active Directory and OpenLDAP have different authentication requirements: •

To use Active Directory with Storage Center, you must configure Kerberos authentication. Kerberos ensures encrypted communications with the Active Directory server(s).

•

To use OpenLDAP with Storage Center, you can either use password authentication or Kerberos authentication. Kerberos ensures encrypted communications with the OpenLDAP server(s). If you configure password authentication instead of Kerberos, you must configure SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with the OpenLDAP server(s).

Choosing an Account Management Method The table below briefly compares both account management methods. Type

Advantages

Disadvantages

Local accounts

•

Good in environments with few Storage Center Administrators or where few ad-hoc accounts are needed.

•

•

If the Active Directory/OpenLDAP servers are inaccessible, users can still be authenticated.

In environments that use Active Directory/OpenLDAP, parallel sets of users need to be maintained in Active Directory/OpenLDAP and System Manager.

•

In environments with multiple Storage Centers, users need to be created on each Storage Center.

Allows central management of users. •

If the Active Directory/OpenLDAP servers are inaccessible, users cannot be authenticated.

Active Directory/ • OpenLDAP • accounts

Dell Compellent

Allows multiple Storage Centers to point to Active Directory/OpenLDAP so users can log on to each Storage Center.

•

Granting or removing access by user group allows scalability in large environments with many Storage Center Administrators.

•

Leverages existing Active Directory/ OpenLDAP infrastructure.

299

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Enabling Directory Services Authentication Before you can grant Storage Center access to directory users and directory user groups, you must first configure Storage Center to communicate with one or more Active Directory/ OpenLDAP servers. If you use Kerberos authentication, you must also configure Storage Center to communicate with the Kerberos Key Distribution Center (KDC). Prerequisites •

An Active Directory or OpenLDAP directory service must be deployed in your environment.

•

Storage Center must have network connectivity to the directory service.

•

You must be familiar with the Active Directory/OpenLDAP configuration of the directory service.

•

Storage Center requires credentials from a directory service user that is allowed to query the directory service and who has sufficient privileges to perform a bind operation.

•

(Active Directory only) Joining the controller to the domain requires credentials from a directory service user who is an administrator and who has sufficient privileges to create a computer record in the directory.

•

(Active Directory only) To join the controller to the domain, forward and reverse DNS records for the Storage Center must be created in the domain. For a single-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the controller IP address. For a dualcontroller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the management IP address.

•

(OpenLDAP only) To use password authentication with OpenLDAP, an SSL certificate is required to communicate with the directory service using SSL/TLS.

Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Access→ Configure Authentication. The Configure Authentication wizard starts.

300

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Enabling Directory Services Authentication

2 Select the Enable External Directory Services check box. 3 Enter the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of one or more domain controllers separated by spaces. 4 Click Start.

5 From the Directory Type drop-down menu, select the directory service implementation to use: either Active Directory or Open LDAP. 6 Specify Active Directory/OpenLDAP connection information and parameters for your environment. Required fields are denoted with an asterisk (*). Note: You can specify custom LDAP search filters at the command-line interface (CLI) to distinguish a pool of users or user groups from which Storage Center access can be granted. Dell Compellent strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services for assistance if you want to use custom LDAP search filters.

Dell Compellent

301

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Field

Description

URI*

Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for one or more Active Directory/OpenLDAP servers to which Storage Center will connect. Use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the servers. Example URIs for two servers: ldap://server1.example.com ldap://server2.example.com:1234

Note: Adding multiple servers ensures continued authorization of users in the event of a resource outage. If Storage Center cannot establish contact with the first server, Storage Center will attempt to connect to the remaining servers in the order listed. Server Connection Timeout*

Maximum time (in seconds) that Storage Center will wait while attempting to connect to an Active Directory/OpenLDAP server.

Base DN*

LDAP Base Distinguished Name. The Base DN indicates where in the directory to begin searching for users.

Relative Base

LDAP node where computers are stored. If you configure Active Directory, the Relative Base indicates where the controller should be joined to the domain.

Storage Center Hostname*

•

For a single-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified hostname for the controller IP address.

•

For a dual-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified hostname for the management IP address.

LDAP Domain*

LDAP domain to search.

Auth Bind Username*

Fully qualified username of the user that Storage Center uses to connect to and search the Active Directory/OpenLDAP server. The account must have sufficient privileges to perform a bind operation.

Auth Bind Password*

Password for the Auth Bind Username.

7 (Optional) Click Test Servers to verify that Storage Center can communicate with the specified Active Directory/OpenLDAP server(s). 8 (Conditional) If you configured OpenLDAP and want to use password authentication, upload certificates to use SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with the OpenLDAP server(s). a Click Upload TLS Cert. b Browse to and select the certificate file for the directory server, in .pem format, and then click Continue. This certificate contains the key information from the directory service. c Browse to and select the CA bundle certificate file, in .pem format, and then click Continue. The CA bundle certificate contains the signer information from the directory service. 9 Click Continue. If you configured Active Directory, Kerberos authentication is required, therefore, the Enable Kerberos option will not display.

302

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Enabling Directory Services Authentication

10 (Conditional) If you configured Active Directory, or if you configured OpenLDAP and want to use Kerberos, configure Kerberos authentication. Required fields are denoted with an asterisk (*). a If you configured OpenLDAP, select the Enable Kerberos check box. b Specify Kerberos connection information for your environment. Field

Description

Domain Realms*

Kerberos domain realm to authenticate against. In Windows networks, this is the domain name in uppercase characters.

KDC Hostname*

Fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the Key Distribution Center (KDC) to which Storage Center will connect.

Password Renew Rate (Days)

Number of days before the keytab is regenerated. The default value is 0, which equates to a password renew rate of 14 days.

11 Click Continue.

Dell Compellent

303

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

12 (Conditional) If you configured Active Directory, join the controller to the domain to allow Storage Center to communicate with the directory service. Note: To join the controller to the domain, forward and reverse DNS records for the Storage Center must be created in the domain. For a single-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the controller IP address. For a dual-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the management IP address. a Click Join.

304

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Enabling Directory Services Authentication

b Enter the user name of a directory service administrator in the DS Admin Username field. This account must have sufficient privileges to create a computer record in the directory. c Enter the password for the directory service user in the DS Admin Password field. d Click Join Now. 13 Click Finish Now. See Also Grant Access to a Directory User on page 307 Grant Access to a Directory User Group on page 308

Dell Compellent

305

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Managing Users To create and delete users, grant access to directory users and directory user groups, or change properties for other users, you must have Administrator privileges. Volume Managers and Reporters can change their own properties but cannot change properties for anyone else.

Create a Local User Use the Create User wizard to add local users that can access Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree, right-click the Users icon. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create User. The Create User wizard starts.

3 Enter a User Name and the Full Name of the user. 4 Select a Privileges level for the user. 5 Select a Session Timeout for the user. 6 Add any optional Notes. 7 Click Continue. 8 Enter the user's email information. This information is used to contact the user when alerts occur. To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must be configured to send a test email to the user’s email address. 9 Click Continue. 10 Enter the user’s contact information: Department, Title, Location, Business Phone, Mobile Phone, and Home Phone. These fields are optional. 11 Click Continue. 12 Enter and confirm a password for the user. A password is required. 13 Click Continue. 14 (Required only when creating a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist, select a User Group to assign to the user. If a User Group has not been created, click Create User Group.

306

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Users

15 Click Continue. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the user. 16 Click Create Now.

Grant Access to a Directory User Use the Grant Access to Directory User wizard to grant individual directory users access to Storage Center. Prerequisites Directory services authentication must be enabled. See Enabling Directory Services Authentication on page 300. Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Grant Access to Directory User. The Grant Access to Directory User wizard displays.

2 Enter the fully qualified user name of the directory user in the User Name field. 3 Enter the Distinguished Name of the directory user in the Distinguished Name field. 4 Click Continue. 5 Select a Privileges level for the user. 6 Select a Session Timeout for the user. 7 Add any optional Notes. 8 Click Continue. 9 Enter the user's email information. This information is used to contact the user when alerts occur. To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must be configured to send a test email to the user’s email address. 10 Click Continue. 11 Enter the user’s contact information: Department, Title, Location, Business Phone, Mobile Phone, and Home Phone. These fields are optional. 12 Click Continue.

Dell Compellent

307

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

13 (Required only when creating a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist, select a User Group to assign to the user. If a User Group has not been created, click Create User Group. 14 Click Continue. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the user. 15 Click Grant Access.

Grant Access to a Directory User Group Use the Grant Access to Directory Group wizard to grant Storage Center access to users who are members of a directory user group. Note: User properties such as user email information and user contact information are not configured as part of the Grant Access to Directory Group wizard. Members of directory user groups must log on to System Manager once before they display in the Users node in the System Tree. Then, the user’s attributes can be configured by modifying the user’s properties. Prerequisites Directory services authentication must be enabled. See Enabling Directory Services Authentication on page 300. Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Grant Access to Directory Group. The Grant Access to Directory Group wizard displays.

2 Enter a display name for the directory user group in the Display Name field. This is the name that you want to display in System Manager.

308

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Users

3 Enter the Distinguished Name of the directory user group in the Distinguished Name field. 4 Select a Privileges level for the directory user group. This privileges level applies to all members of the directory user group. 5 (Optional) Click Show Mappings to see a list of directory user groups that are currently assigned to local User Groups. If a directory user group is assigned to multiple local User Groups, each mapping is displayed on a separate line. Directory user groups with Administrator privileges are not displayed because they do not have an assigned User Group. When finished, click Back.

6 Click Continue. 7 (Required only when creating non-Administrator users) If User Groups exist, select a User Group to assign to the directory user group. If a User Group has not been created, click Create User Group. 8 Click Continue. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the directory user group. 9 Click Grant Access.

Dell Compellent

309

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

View Directory User Groups The Manage Directory Group Access window displays current directory user groups that have access to Storage Center. This windows allows you to grant, modify, and remove Storage Center access for directory user groups. From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage Directory Group Access.

310

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Users

Modify User Properties Use the User Properties dialog box to view or modify a user’s general properties, contact information, user view access, or notes. You must have Administrator privileges to view information for another user. Volume Managers and Reporters can view their own properties but cannot view properties for anyone else.

Modify General User Properties Use the General tab on the User Properties dialog box to change general properties, such as full name and session timeout, for the selected user. 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The User Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click the General tab.

4 Change the full name or session timeout as needed, or upgrade privileges for a Volume Manager or Reporter user. 5 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

311

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Modify User Contact Information Use the Contact tab on the User Properties dialog box to change user contact information, such as phone numbers and email addresses, for the selected user. 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The User Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click the Contact tab.

4 Change any of the fields as needed. 5 To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must be configured to send a test email to the user’s email address. 6 Click OK.

312

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Users

Modify User View Access Use the Tabs tab on the User Properties dialog box to restrict access to the View menu options for the selected user. 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The User Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click the Tabs tab. System Manager displays a list of Views to which the user has access.

4 Select or clear Views to which the user has access. 5 Select the Save tab changes across sessions check box to ensure that the Tabs settings remain after the user logs off. 6 Click OK.

Modify User Notes Use the Info tab on the User Properties dialog box to add notes or view general information about the user. 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the Info tab. System Manager displays the following information: •

Date Created: User creation date

•

Created By: Who created the user

•

Date Updated: Last date user properties were updated

•

Updated By: Who updated the user properties

4 Enter Notes. 5 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

313

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Change Local User Passwords Users can change their own passwords, and Administrators can change all passwords. Note: Passwords for directory users are maintained in Active Directory/OpenLDAP and cannot be changed using System Manager. 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Change User Password. The Change User Password dialog box appears. 3 Enter and confirm a password. 4 Click OK. The password is changed.

Downgrade User Privileges To downgrade user privileges, you must delete the user and re-create the user with a new name. You cannot recreate a user with downgraded privileges with the same user name. You must have Administrator privileges to delete and create users. See Also Delete a User on page 315 Create a Local User on page 306 Grant Access to a Directory User on page 307

Upgrade User Privileges You must have Administrator privileges to upgrade user privileges. 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The User Properties dialog box appears. 3 In the Privileges field, select an upgraded privilege level. 4 Click OK.

Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group User privileges are modified on a group basis rather than a user basis because all members of the directory user group must have the same privileges. You must have Administrator privileges to downgrade or upgrade user privileges for directory user groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage Directory Group Access. The Manage Directory Group Access window appears. 2 Select the directory user group for which you want to modify user privileges. 3 Click Modify Group Access. 4 In the Privileges field, select a new privilege level. 5 Click Continue. 6 Click Continue. 7 Click Modify Access. 8 Click Close.

314

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing Users

Disable a User Users that have been disabled cannot log on to System Manager. You must have Administrator privileges to disable a user. 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The User Properties dialog box appears. 3 Clear the Enabled check box to disable a user. Note: If you disable yourself, you will not be able to log on again. If all users are disabled, no one will be able to log on to change the restriction. Everyone, including you, will be locked out of System Manager. 4 Click OK.

Delete a User You must have Administrator privileges to delete a user. Note: Once a user is deleted, that user name cannot be reused for a new user. You can, however, reuse the same user name when restoring a user. Note: Directory user group membership should be maintained in Active Directory/ OpenLDAP and individual members should not be deleted using System Manager. To remove access for an entire directory user group, see Remove Access for a Directory User Group on page 315 1 In the System Tree, right-click a user name. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Delete. System Manager asks you to confirm. 3 Click Yes. The user is deleted.

Remove Access for a Directory User Group You must have Administrator privileges to remove Storage Center access for users who are members of a directory user group. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage Directory Group Access. The Manage Directory Group Access window appears. 2 Select the directory user group for which you want to remove Storage Center access. 3 Click Remove Group Access. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Yes. 5 Click Close.

Dell Compellent

315

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Restore a User You can restore a previously deleted user. You must have Administrator privileges to restore a user. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Restore Deleted User. The Restore Deleted User wizard starts. 2 From the list of deleted users, select the user you want to restore. You can only select one user at a time to restore. 3 Click Continue. 4 Enter the user's email information and click Continue. This information is used to contact the user when alerts occur. 5 Enter the user’s contact information and click Continue. 6 Enter and confirm a password for the user and click Continue. 7 (Required only when restoring a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist, select a User Group to assign to the user. If a User Group has not been created, click Create User Group. 8 Click Continue. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the user. 9 Click Restore Now. The user is restored and the user name is displayed in the System Tree.

316

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring User Volume Defaults

Configuring User Volume Defaults User volume defaults affect all levels of users: Administrator, Volume Manager, and Reporter. •

Administrators can always use the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box and change any user volume defaults.

•

Volume Managers can only change volume defaults if an Administrator enables Allow User to Modify Preferences. If enabled, Volume Managers can change their own volume default preferences. If disabled, the Volume Manager does not have the option to change volume default preferences.

•

Reporters cannot create volumes so volume defaults do not apply.

There are three different user volume default commands. Though they are similar, each command has a different purpose: •

My User Volume Defaults: With Administrator privileges, you can change your own volume default preferences.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: With Administrator privileges, you can select one or more current users and change their user volume defaults. If you change the volume defaults for another Administrator, when that user logs on, the defaults you enabled appear as the initial configuration. That Administrator can, of course, change these defaults. With Administrator privileges, if you disable the option to change Create Volume defaults for a Volume Manager, that Volume Manager will not be able to change Create Volume defaults. Specifically, if you disable the option to change these defaults and advanced Create Volume options are disabled, a Volume Manager will not be able to select non-standard options for the volume for which he/she is responsible.

•

New User Volume Defaults: New user volume defaults apply to users that will be created in the future. This streamlines the process of creating users. If you create Volume Managers and by default disable their ability to change their user volume defaults, they will not be able to change Create Volume defaults. Administrative users will be created with new user volume defaults, but they can always changes these defaults. New user volume defaults are only for new users. Defaults are not retroactive.

Dell Compellent

317

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Select Whether Users Can Change Their Volume Defaults Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to select whether users can change their volume defaults. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

•

New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults.

2 Click the General tab.

3 Select or clear the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box to permit or disallow a user to change his or her defaults. All users with Administrator privileges can allow or disallow all other users from modifying preferences, including their own. 4 Click OK.

318

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring User Volume Defaults

Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set default disk and cache options. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

•

New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults.

2 Click the General tab.

3 Set these defaults: •

Select a Disk Folder from which to draw storage. Select or clear the Allow Changes check box to indicate whether disk folder options are presented to the user when he or she creates a volume.

•

Select Cache options. If caching is disabled for the Storage Center, you can enable it for a volume but it will not do any good. However, if cache settings are enabled for the Storage Center, you can enable it for an individual volume. Select or clear the Allow Changes check box to indicate which caching options are presented to the user when he or she creates a volume.

4 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

319

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Set the Default Volume Size Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default size for new volumes. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

•

New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults.

2 Click the General tab.

3 Enter a Volume Size (or accept the default). The default is 500 GB. 4 Click OK.

320

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring User Volume Defaults

Set the Default Volume Name Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default name for new volumes. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

•

New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults.

2 Click the General tab.

3 Enter a Base Volume Name (or accept the default). When you create many volumes at one time, System Manager increments this name by one. As you add volumes, the names appear as New Volume 1, New Volume 2, New Volume 3, and so forth. 4 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

321

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Set Storage Volume Defaults Use the Advanced tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set default data storage options. Caution: Changing advanced user volume defaults can adversely affect Storage Center performance. We strongly recommend you do not change these defaults. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

•

New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults.

2 Click the Advanced tab.

3 Set the storage volume defaults. 4 Click OK. See Also Remove a Storage Class on page 209 Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210 About Storage Profiles on page 212

322

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring User Volume Defaults

Set Replay Volume Defaults Use the Replay tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set options that determine whether Replays are assigned to new volumes by default, and if so, which Replay profile to assign to the volume. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

2 Click the Replay tab.

3 From the drop-down menu, select the default Replay schedule behavior: •

Never schedule Replays during volume creation

•

Always prompt for Replay scheduling during volume creation

•

Always use the Default Replay Profile to schedule Replays for new volumes

4 Select a default Replay Profile. 5 Enter a Minimum Allowed Replay Interval (or accept the default). The default is 5 minutes. This restricts the intervals between Replays and prevents a user from overloading the Storage Center with Replays. 6 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

323

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Set Mapping Volume Defaults Use the Mapping tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set options that determine the level of mapping displayed to the user and whether to automatically map volumes to a default server. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

2 On the General tab, make sure the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box is selected. 3 Click the Mapping tab.

4 Set these defaults: •

Select or clear the Allow advanced mapping check box. If you allow advanced mapping, select or clear the Show advanced details in mapping displays check box.

•

Select the Automatically map volumes to default server check box to speed volume creation. If the Automatically map volume to default server check box is selected, select a server to automatically map volumes to.

5 Click OK. See Also Server Mapping on page 107 324

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring User Volume Defaults

Set the Default Server Operating System Use the Mapping tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default server Operating System. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: •

My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults.

•

Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.

2 On the General tab, make sure the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box is selected. 3 Click the Mapping tab.

4 From the Default Server Operating System drop-down menu, select an Operating System. 5 Click OK.

Dell Compellent

325

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Managing User Groups Volume, server, and disk folder access for Volume Managers and Reporters is granted through the User Groups to which the user is assigned. Administrators have access to all folders and do not have an assigned User Group. To manage user groups, you must have Administrator privileges.

Create a New User Group Use the Create User Group wizard to create new user groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, click New Group. The Create User Group wizard starts.

3 From the list of volume folders, select a volume folder to be included in the new User Group. Users will have access to volumes in this folder. If you do not want subfolders to be included, clear the Include Sub Folders check box. 4 (Optional) Click Create a New Folder to create a new folder not listed on this screen. 5 Click Next. 6 From the list of server folders, select a server folder to be included in the new User Group. Users will have access to servers in this folder. If you do not want subfolders to be included, clear the Include Sub Folders check box. 7 (Optional) Click Create a New Folder to create a new folder not listed on this screen. 8 Click Next. 9 From the list of disk folders, select a disk folder to be included in the new User Group. This folder contains the storage to be used for volumes created by this User Group. 10 Click Next. 11 Enter a User Group Name (or accept the default). 12 Click Create Now. You are returned to the original Manage User Groups page.

326

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing User Groups

Rename a User Group Use the Update User Group page to change a User Group name. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to rename.

3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears.

4 Click Rename. 5 Enter a New Name for the User Group. 6 Click Rename Now. 7 Click Return. 8 Click Close.

Dell Compellent

327

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Remove a folder from a User Group Removing a folder from a User Group denies access to that folder to users who are assigned to that User Group. Note: A user who has access to more than one User Group may still have access to the folder you removed from a specific User Group. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group from which to remove a folder. 3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears showing volume, server, and disk folders accessible by the User Group. 4 Select a folder or subfolder to remove. 5 Click Remove Folder. System Manager asks you to confirm. 6 If you do not want to remove all subfolders of the selected folder, clear the Remove from sub folders check box. 7 Click Yes. 8 Click Return. 9 Click Close.

Add a Folder to a User Group Adding a folder to a User Group gives access to that folder to users who are assigned to that User Group. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to which to add a folder. 3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears showing volume, server, and disk folders accessible by the User Group. 4 Click Add Folder. 5 Select one of the following: •

Add Volume Folder: System Manager displays a list of volume folders. Select a volume folder to add. Choose whether to include or exclude subfolders.

•

Add Server Folder: System Manager displays a list of server folders. Select a server folder to add. Choose whether to include or exclude subfolders.

•

Add Disk Folder: System Manager displays a list of disk folders. Select a disk folder to add.

6 Click Add Now. 7 Click Return. 8 Click Close.

328

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Managing User Groups

Delete a User Group Use the Manage User Groups page to delete User Groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to delete. 3 Click Delete Group. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Yes. 5 Click Close.

Add a User Group to a User Adding User Groups to an existing Volume Manager or Reporter user allows the user to access the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Add User Groups. The Add User Groups wizard starts. 2 Click a user name to which to add a User Group. 3 Click Continue. 4 Select a User Group to add to the user. 5 Click Add Now.

Remove a User Group From a User Removing User Groups from an existing Volume Manager or Reporter user denies access for the user to the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Remove User Groups. The Remove User Groups wizard starts. 2 Click a user name from which to remove a User Group. 3 Click Continue. 4 Select a User Group to remove from the user. 5 Click Continue. System Manager asks you to confirm. 6 Click Yes.

Dell Compellent

329

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

Add or Remove a Mapping from a Local User Group to a Directory User Group Adding or removing local User Group associations is performed on a group basis rather than a user basis because all members of the directory user group must be mapped to the same User Groups. Mapping User Groups to an existing directory user group with Volume Manager or Reporter privileges allows the users to access the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups. Removing a User Group association from an existing directory user group with Volume Manager or Reporter privileges denies access for the users to the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage Directory Group Access. The Manage Directory Group Access window appears. 2 Select the directory user group for which you want to modify User Group associations. 3 Click Modify Group Access. 4 Click Continue. 5 Select a User Group to add to or remove from the directory user group. 6 Click Continue. 7 Click Modify Access. 8 Click Close.

330

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Users

User Interface Reference for Users This section provides a description of user interface elements used for user information.

General Information About All Users The Users node in the System Tree displays a list of current users and allows you to create and modify users. Note: Members of directory user groups appear in the Users node only after they log on to System Manager for the first time.

Field

Description

Name

Name of the user.

Enabled

Indicates whether the user is enabled.

Privileges

Privilege level assigned to the user — Administrator, Volume Manager, or Reporter.

Full Name

Full name specified for the user.

User Groups

User Groups assign to the user.

See Also Create a Local User on page 306 Grant Access to a Directory User on page 307 Grant Access to a Directory User Group on page 308

Dell Compellent

331

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

General Information About an Individual User When you select a user name in the System Tree, System Manager displays a summary of the user’s settings.

Field

Description

Name

Name of the user.

Index

Unique user ID. This number is required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification.

332

Type

Object type — in this case User.

Enabled

Indicates whether the user is enabled.

Privileges

Privilege level assigned to the user — Administrator, Volume Manager, or Reporter.

User Groups

User Groups assign to the user.

Session Timeout

Time the user can be inactive in System Manager before the user is automatically logged out.

Full Name

Full name specified for the user.

Department

Department specified for the user.

Title

Title specified for the user.

Location

Location specified for the user.

Business Phone

Business phone number specified for the user.

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

User Interface Reference for Users

Field

Description

Mobile Phone

Mobile phone number specified for the user.

Home Phone

Home phone number specified for the user.

Email

Email address specified for the user.

Email 2

Email address specified for the user.

Email 3

Email address specified for the user.

Date Created

User creation date.

Created By

Who created the user.

Date Updated

Last date user properties were updated.

Updated By

Who updated the user properties.

Notes

Notes specified for the user.

See Also Modify User Properties on page 311 Downgrade User Privileges on page 314 Upgrade User Privileges on page 314 Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group on page 314

Dell Compellent

333

Chapter 9 Users and User Groups

334

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

A

Server HBA Settings This appendix contains summary information about HBA settings. Consult the Dell Compellent Knowledge Center for additional information such as: current technical alerts, white papers, best practices, tip sheets, and visual demos.

Contents Queue Depth Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Settings by HBA Vendor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Settings by Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Queue Depth Considerations In SAN environments, HBA queue depth represents the number of pending storage I/O operations waiting to be executed against the SAN. To maximize performance, it is important to properly configure HBA queue depth to ensure that the storage subsystem runs efficiently. A queue depth setting that is too high may result in poor performance while a queue depth setting that is too low may under-utilize storage ports. Queue depth settings on HBAs can also be used to throttle servers so that the most critical servers are allowed greater access to the required storage and network bandwidth. Therefore, it is important to properly tune HBA queue depth settings (which may differ from the factory default settings) for your configuration. This appendix offers some suggested settings. You should, however, be aware that choosing a proper queue depth is configuration-dependent. Settings will vary depending on: the applications being run, the number of ports, the number of volumes, and so forth. It is also strongly recommended that settings be tested before being put into production mode.

Settings by HBA Vendor This section includes information for the following HBA types:

Dell Compellent

•

Cisco Fibre Channel Cards

•

Emulex Fibre Channel Cards

•

LSI Cards

•

Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards

•

Qlogic iSCSI Cards

335

Appendix A Server HBA Settings

Cisco Fibre Channel Cards For adapter settings and advanced settings, configure values as follows Field

Setting

FCP Error Recovery

Disabled (default)

Flogi Retries

60

Flogi Timeout

4000 (default)

Plogi Retries

60

Plogi Timeout

20000 (default)

Port Down Timeout

10000 (default)

Port Down IO Retry

60 (default)

Link Down Timeout

30000 (default)

Emulex Fibre Channel Cards You can configure settings for the Emulex Fibre Channel adapter from the Emulex LightPulse BIOS on system boot by pressing or when prompted. If you are using Windows, you can also use the Emulex HBAnywhere utility to modify HBA configuration settings. Download this utility from: www.emulex.com.

Adapter Settings For adapter and advanced settings, values should be configured as follows: Field

Setting

NodeTimeOut

60

QueueDepth

254 Note: This is a generally recommended setting. Your configuration may perform better with a different setting.

Topology

336

1

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Settings by HBA Vendor

See Also Queue Depth Considerations on page 335

Dell Compellent

337

Appendix A Server HBA Settings

Registry Editor Parameters To view Registry Editor parameters for Elxstor port settings, go to: Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\elxstor\ Parameters\[WWPN of port on card]

To view the Registry Editor parameters for Elxstor device settings, go to: Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\elxstor\ Parameters\Device

LSI Cards There are no configurable settings for LSI HBA cards.

338

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Settings by HBA Vendor

Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards QLA23xx / QLE23xx / QLA24xx / QLE25xx You can configure QLogic Fibre Channel settings from theQLogic BIOS FastUtil on system boot by pressing when prompted. If you are using Windows, you can also use the QLogic SANsurfer utility to modify HBA configuration settings. Download this utility from: http://www.qlogic.com. For adapter settings and advanced settings, configure values as follows: Field

Setting

Connection options

1 for point-to-point only

Login retry count

60 attempts

Port down retry count

60 attempts

Link down timeout

30 seconds

Queue depth

256 Note: This is a generally recommended setting. Your configuration may perform better with a different setting.

See Also Queue Depth Considerations on page 335

Dell Compellent

339

Appendix A Server HBA Settings

Qlogic iSCSI Cards QLA40XX / QLE40xx In addition to the settings recommended for QLogic Fibre Channel adapters, set the ARP Redirect field to Enabled. 1 From the QLogic SANsurfer iSCSI HBA Manager, click the Port Options tab. 2 Click the Firmware tab. 3 Select an HBA and enable ARP redirect by clicking the check box in the ARP Redirect column. This setting is circled in red below.

4 Select OK and then Close. 5 To save settings, select the Save Port Settings option. If prompted for a password, enter config. After the password is accepted, the card will reset and the new configuration will be activated and saved.

340

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Settings by Server Operating System

Settings by Server Operating System This section includes information for the following operating systems: •

Citrix XenServer Version 5.x and Above

•

HP-UX Settings

•

IBM AIX Settings

•

Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings

•

Novell Netware Settings

•

Oracle Solaris Settings

•

Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings

•

SuSE Linux SLES

•

VMWare Settings

Citrix XenServer Version 5.x and Above Use the timeout values given in this section to ensure that the Citrix XenServer fails over properly. Note: If the server is configured in a high-availability cluster, contact Citrix for best practices for setting high-availability timeout values. 1 Open the /opt/xensource/sm/mpathHBA file. 2 Change the settings in the following fields: Field

Setting

DEFAULT_TIMEOUT

60

MPATH_TIMEOUT

60

3 Save the file and reboot.

HP-UX Settings HP-UX Version 11.31 HP-UX 11.31 requires that “Agile Addressing” is enabled for proper failover of Dell Compellent Storage Center controllers.

HP-UX Version 11.21 or Earlier No specific setting changes are required, however, a Cisco fabric with Persistent FCID enabled is required to survive Dell Compellent Storage Center controller failover or port rebalance.

IBM AIX Settings The Compellent MPIO ODM Path Control Module must be installed on the AIX server for proper operation with the Dell Compellent Storage Center.

Dell Compellent

Field

Setting

queue_depth hdisk attribute

32

rw_timeout hdisk

60

341

Appendix A Server HBA Settings

Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings See the following Microsoft documentation for complete details on changing registry values for the iSCSI initiator: http://blogs.msdn.com/b/san/archive/2008/07/27/microsoft-iscsi-software-initiator-isnsserver-timers-quick-reference.aspx

Disk Time Out Setting Verify that this value is set to 60 to indicate a 60-second disk timeout threshold. If this value is set incorrectly, use the Registry Editor to correct: 1 In regedit, locate: H_Key_Local_Machine\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Disk

2 Reset the value to: TimeoutValue=60

Note: The default value for Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 and later (including Windows Server 2008) is 60 seconds. However, Windows Server 2003 RTM contained a different timeout value than specified. If clustering was installed before Service Pack 1, then installer will set the TimeoutValue to 20 on the cluster nodes. This is a bug in Windows Server 2003 RTM and was corrected in Service Pack 1. It is recommended that the latest service pack be installed prior to installing the clustering service.

Novell Netware Settings In the nwserver/startup.ncf file, add: /LUNS /ALLPATHS /ALLPORTS /PORTDOWN=60

to the end of the Fibre Channel driver load line.

Oracle Solaris Settings Changes to Solaris settings require a reboot. •

/kernel/drv/fcp.conf

To the bottom of the fcp.conf file, add: fcp_offline_delay=60

Note: This setting change requires a reboot. •

/kernel/drv/qlc.conf

Change the following variables to their associated values:

342

Field

Setting

login-retry-count

60

port-down-retry-count

60

link-down-timeout

30

connection-options

1

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Settings by Server Operating System

Note: For QLogic drivers, make the same changes to the /kernel/drv/ qla2300.conf file.

Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings Non-Boot Environment 1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe.conf file, add: "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65 # echo "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65" >> /etc/modprobe.conf # modprobe -r qla2xxx # modprobe qla2xxx

2 Reload the driver.

Boot Environment 1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe.conf file, add: options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=60 # echo "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=60" >> /etc/modprobe.conf # mkinitrd -f -v /boot/initrd-.img # reboot

2 Update the init RAM disk. 3 Reboot the server.

SuSE Linux SLES Non-Boot Environment 1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe.d/qla2xxx file, add: options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65 # echo "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65" >> /etc/modprobe.d/qla2xxx # modprobe -r qla2xxx # modprobe qla2xxx

2 Reload the driver.

Boot Environment 1 To the end of the kernel line in /boot/grub/menu.lst, add: qla2xxx.qlport_down_retry=65 # vi /boot/grub/menu.lst # reboot

2 Reboot the server.

VMWare Settings No changes are required.

Dell Compellent

343

Appendix A Server HBA Settings

344

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

B

iSCSI Settings This appendix lists recommended and required settings when using iSCSI cards.

Contents Flow Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Other iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Flow Control Settings The following subsections provide recommended flow control settings.

Ethernet Flow Control Ethernet (or link level) flow control is a mechanism for temporarily stopping data transmission when a NIC, an HBA port, or a switch port is transmitting data faster than its target port can accept the data. Ethernet flow control allows a port to send a PAUSE frame to a target port. The PAUSE frame temporarily pauses transmission until the target port is again able to service requests.

Switch Ports and Flow Control Ethernet Flow Control should be set to ON for switch ports connected to Storage Center controller card ports. Switch port settings for server NICs and other switch ports in the switch network should be set to ON as recommended by the vendor.

Bi-directional Flow Control Dell Compellent recommends the following settings as Best Practice when enabling bidirectional flow control:

Dell Compellent

•

Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all switch interfaces used by servers or controllers for iSCSI traffic.

•

Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all server interfaces used for iSCSI traffic. Storage Center and QLogic HBAs automatically enable this feature.

•

Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all other interfaces that handle iSCSI traffic. This includes all devices used for replication between two sites.

345

Appendix B iSCSI Settings

Jumbo Frames and Flow Control Some switches have limited buffer sizes and can support either jumbo frames or flow control, but cannot support both at the same time. If you must choose between the two features, Dell Compellent strongly recommends choosing flow control. However, if you use jumbo frames, be aware of the following: •

Make sure that all servers, switches, and storage are fully operational before enabling jumbo frames. This simplifies troubleshooting initial deployments.

•

All devices connected through iSCSI must support 9K jumbo frames.

•

All devices used to connect iSCSI devices must support 9K jumbo frames. This means every switch, router, WAN accelerator, and any other network device that handles iSCSI traffic must support 9K jumbo frames. If you are not sure that every device in your iSCSI network supports 9K jumbo frames, then do NOT turn on this feature.

•

When jumbo frames are enabled, devices on both sides (server and SAN) need them enabled. It is recommended that any change to the jumbo frames enabled/disabled setting is done during a maintenance window. If servers have jumbo frames enabled first, the Storage Center will not understand the servers’ packets. If Storage Center has jumbo frames enabled first, the servers will not understand the Storage Center’s packets.

•

QLogic 4010 series cards do not support jumbo frames. To display the model number of a card using the Storage Center System Manager GUI as follows: a Expand the System Tree as follows: Controller→controller serial number→IO cards→iSCSI b Highlight the port. The general tab displays the model number in the description.

346

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Other iSCSI Settings

Other iSCSI Settings The following settings are Dell Compellent recommended best practices. Setting

iSCSI Best Practice

Full Duplex

•

Use auto-negotiate for all interfaces that will correctly negotiate at fullduplex and at the maximum speed of the connected port (1GbE or 10GbE).

•

If a switch cannot correctly auto-negotiate at full-duplex or at the maximum speed of the connection, it should be hard set at full-duplex and at the maximum speed of the connected port (1GbE or 10GbE).

MTU

Verify the optimal MTU setting for replications. The default is 1500 but sometimes WAN circuits or VPNs create additional overhead that can cause packet fragmentation. This fragmentation may result in: iSCSI replication failure and/or suboptimal performance. Adjust the MTU setting using the GUI in 6.x Storage Center firmware.

Switch

•

VLAN

Dell Compellent

Configure switch interfaces that directly connect to servers or controllers as forwarding only for Spanning Tree (STP).

•

Ensure that any switches used for iSCSI are of a non-blocking design.

•

When deciding which switches to use, remember you are running SCSI traffic over the switch. Use only quality, managed, enterprise-class networking equipment. It is not recommended to use SBHO (small business/home office) class equipment outside of lab/test environments.

•

Be aware that inter-switch links (ISLs) that forward iSCSI traffic may cause communication issues due to switch-port oversubscription.

•

Maintain separate and dedicated iSCSI VLANs. The VLANs should remain isolated only to links designated to carry iSCSI traffic.

•

Maintain two separate and dedicated VLANs when using multipathed iSCSI.

•

Disable unicast storm control on every switch that handles iSCSI traffic.

•

Disable multicast at the switch level for all iSCSI VLANs. Set multicast storm control to enabled (if available) when multicast can not be disabled.

•

If you will not perform iSCSI replication between systems or sites, disable routing between regular network and iSCSI VLANs.

347

Appendix B iSCSI Settings

348

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

C

UPS User FAQ and Configuration This appendix provides a FAQ for using Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) and describes configuration for two types of UPS.

Contents UPS User FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Configuring an APC™ UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Configuring a Liebert™ UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Dell Compellent

349

Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration

UPS User FAQ When setting up a UPS, you must configure the UPS to “point” to the Storage Center. •

On single controller configurations, configure the UPS to point to the Eth0 address.

•

On dual-controller configurations, configure the UPS to point to the management IP address. On dual-controller configurations, the management IP is used for traps.

Can any brand of UPS be used with the Storage Center? Storage Center supports all APC™ UPS systems that use the AP9630 network management card. How does the Storage Center know which UPS should talk to it? 1 In System Explorer System Tree, right-click the UPS icon. 2 Click Create New UPS from the pop-up menu. The Create UPS wizard opens.

3 Enter the IP Address of the UPS you want the Storage Center to use. This tells the Storage Center to accept messages from the specified UPS. 4 Enter the SNMP Community String. The Community String acts as a password and is included in every packet transmitted between the SNMP manager and the SNMP agent. 5 Select the UPS Type from the drop-down menu. Choices are Liebert or APC. 6 Click Create Now. Do I need to configure the UPS? How do I do this? Yes you must configure the UPS. Configure the UPS either through APC™ PowerChute or through the local serial port. You must provide the IP address of the Storage Center to the UPS. For dual-controller systems, use the management IP address. This is the same IP address as is used for the Storage Center System Manager. What communications protocol does the APC UPS use? APC UPS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). How does the UPS send messages? If the UPS is on the same subnet as the Storage Center, it unicasts UDP packets. If the UPS is on a different subnet(s), it broadcasts UDP packets.

350

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

UPS User FAQ

What information is provided in a UPS message? A UPS message provides messages such as: •

On Battery

•

Off Battery

•

Time to Live

•

Any other information displayed in the UPS GUI

What happens within Storage Center when the UPS says it is On Battery? The following happens within Storage Center when an On Battery message is received: •

The Storage Center turns off write cache and flushes it to disk.

•

The Storage Center then it waits for an Off Battery message or it rides the UPS until it shuts down.

What happens to IO when the battery runs out? The following happens to IO when the battery runs out: •

Because it is down, no in-flight IO requests can be acknowledged by the Storage Center.

•

The driver in the OS exhausts retries or times out and issues an error to the OS that the disk is gone. The OS then notifies the application.

•

When the UPS’s Time to Live expires, the UPS shuts off. This is the time during which the UPS cannot deliver the voltage and/or current to meet load requirements.

What happens to servers when the battery runs out? The following happens to servers when the battery runs out:

Dell Compellent

•

APC™ offers PowerChute Business Edition software for free that is installed in the server. This software monitors UPS state information packets. When a packet is received saying the battery has two minutes (can be configured to other amounts of time) of life left, the software triggers the OS to gracefully shut down the server.

•

When then server is shut down, all IO traffic to the Storage Center ceases, thus allowing it to simply ride the UPS until it shuts down.

351

Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration

Configuring an APC™ UPS You can configure up to four access control entries to specify which Network Management Systems (NMS) have access to this UPS. 1 In a new browser window, enter the IP address of the UPS, assigned or derived from DHCP. The UPS Network Management main window appears. 2 From the main window, click the Administration tab. The Administration pane appears.

3 Click Network. The Network pane appears.

352

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring an APC™ UPS

4 In the TCP/IP menu on the left side, select SNMPv1 →Access Control. The Access Control pane appears.

5 Select Public. The Access Control Entry pane appears.

6 For a single-controller Storage Center, in the Access Control Entry pane, enter the controller IP address in the Access Control Entry pane. 7 As an Access Type, select Read. 8 Click Apply. 9 Add the actual IP address of the clustered controller (not the management IP address).

Dell Compellent

353

Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration

10 Select Notification. The Notification pane appears.

11 In the Notification window, select trap receivers. The Trap Receivers pane appears.

354

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring an APC™ UPS

12 Click Add Trap Receiver. The Trap Receiver pane appears.

13 Enable trap generation for this trap receiver. 14 In the NMS IP/Host name field, enter the following: •

For a single-controller Storage Center, enter the controller IP address.

•

For a dual-controller Storage Center system, enter the IP address of the Management controller. The default, 0.0.0.0, leaves the trap receiver undefined.

15 In the SNMPv1 field, enter Public (the default). 16 When Authenticate Traps is enabled, Storage Center receives authentication traps (traps generated by invalid attempts to log on to this device). To disable that ability, unmark the check box. 17 Click Apply.

Dell Compellent

355

Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration

Modify or Delete a Trap Receiver To modify or delete a trap receiver, click its IP address or host name to access its settings. If you delete a trap receiver, all notification settings configured under Event Actions for the deleted trap receiver are set to their default values.

Configuring a Liebert™ UPS 1 In a new browser window, enter the IP address, assigned or derived from DHCP. The Monitor pane appears. 2 Click the Configure tab. The Configuration Categories window appears.

3 From the tree on the left side, select Management Protocol→SNMP→Access. 4 The system may ask for a user name and password. Enter your user name and password. The Access pane appears.

356

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring a Liebert™ UPS

5 Click Edit. 6 In the Network Name column, enter the following: •

For a single-controller Storage Center system, enter the controller IP address on the first unused line.

•

For a dual-controller Storage Center system, enter the IP address of each controller on the first two unused lines. Do not enter the Management IP of the Storage Center but the true ETH0 IP of each Controller.

7 Select Read access. 8 For Community name enter Public. 9 Click Save. 10 From the tree on the left side, select Management Protocol→SNMP→Traps. The Traps pane appears.

Dell Compellent

357

Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration

11 Click Edit. 12 In the Network Name column, enter the following: •

For a single-controller Storage Center system, enter the controller IP address on the first unused line.

•

For a dual-controller Storage Center system, enter Management IP address (not the ETH0 address).

13 In the Community column, enter Public. 14 Select or clear Heartbeat. 15 Click Save.

358

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Configuring a Liebert™ UPS

Reinitialize the UPS 1 In the menu tree on the left side, click Reinitialize.The Reinitialize pane appears.

2 To save changes, click Reinitialize. The UPS is added to the Storage Center configuration.

Dell Compellent

359

Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration

360

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

D

Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin This appendix describes the Dell Compellent VAAI (vStorage API for Array Integration) Plugin and how to install it on VMware ESX/ESXi 4.1. Note: For ESXi 5.0 and later, VAAI support is included in ESXi and the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin is not required.

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Dell Compellent

361

Appendix D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin

Introduction VAAI is an API for storage partners that allows ESX/ESXi hosts to offload operations that involve file locking, initializing file systems, and copying or moving data directly to back-end storage. By offloading these tasks, VAAI both conserves storage fabric bandwidth and reduces resources used on ESX/ESXi hosts. In general, VAAI improves data transfer performance and is transparent to the user. For ESX/ESXi 4.1, the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin must be installed on each ESX/ESXi host in a datacenter to offload storage operations to a Dell Compellent Storage Center. The offloaded storage operations are: •

Block zeroing: Enables Dell Compellent Storage Centers to zero out a large number of blocks to speed up provisioning of virtual machines on ESX/ESXi hosts.

•

Full copy: Enables Dell Compellent Storage Centers to make full copies of data within the array without having the ESX/ESXi host read and write the data.

•

Hardware-assisted locking: Provides an alternative means to protect the metadata for VMFS cluster-file systems, thereby improving the scalability of multiple ESX/ESXi hosts sharing a Dell Compellent Storage Center datastore.

Listed by Storage Center version, the following table displays offload operations supported by Dell Compellent. Storage Center Version

Supported Offload Operations

4.5 – 5.5.1

None

5.5.2 and later

Block zeroing

6.0 and later

Block zeroing Full copy Hardware-assisted locking

Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 Follow these steps to install the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin. 1 List the hardware acceleration claim rules on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=VAAI

If claim rules exist that have COMPELNT listed as the vendor in the Matches column, remove these claim rules by referring to Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 on page 364. 2 Use vMotion to move all of the virtual machines off the ESX/ESXi host or shut down all of the virtual machines and put the host into maintenance mode. 3 Use the SCP (Secure Copy) utility to copy the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin file (vmware-esx-dell-vaaip_compellent.vib) to the ESX/ESXi host. Note: For information on using the SCP utility to copy files to and from an ESX/ESXi host, see KB Article: 1918 on the VMware Knowledge Base (http://kb.vmware.com/). 4 Install the plugin on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the following command: esxupdate -b vmware-esx-dell_vaaip_compellent.vib update

362

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1

5 Reboot the ESX/ESXi host. 6 Define hardware acceleration claim rules for the plugin by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule add --claimrule-class=Filter --plugin=VAAI_FILTER --type=vendor --vendor=COMPELNT --autoassign esxcli corestorage claimrule add --claimrule-class=VAAI --plugin= DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT --type=vendor --vendor=COMPELNT --autoassign esxcli corestorage claimrule load --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule load --claimrule-class=VAAI esxcli corestorage claimrule run --claimrule-class=Filter

7 Verify that the new claim rules, which have COMPELNT listed as the vendor, were successfully added by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=VAAI

Example of command output: Rule Class Filter Filter

Rule Class Type Plugin 5001 runtime vendor VAAI_FILTER 5001 file vendor VAAI_FILTER

Matches vendor=COMPELNT model=* vendor=COMPELNT model=*

Rule Class Rule Class Type Plugin Matches VAAI 5001 runtime vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=* VAAI 5001 file vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=*

8 To verify that the installation of the plugin was successful, execute the following command and verify that DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT is listed in the VAAI Plugin Name field for one or more devices: esxcli vaai device list

Example of command output: naa.6000d3100001db000000000000000094 Device Display Name: Volume1 VAAI Plugin Name: DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT

9 To verify the hardware acceleration status of storage devices, execute the following command: esxcli corestorage device list

The VAAI Status field, in the command output, displays the hardware acceleration status of a storage device. The hardware acceleration statuses for the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin are:

Dell Compellent

•

Unknown: Hardware acceleration is enabled for the storage device and the back-end storage is Storage Center 5. The Attached Filters field displays the name of the VAAI filter attached to the storage device.

•

Supported: Hardware acceleration is enabled for the storage device and the back-end storage is Storage Center 6.The Attached Filters field displays the name of the VAAI filter attached to the storage device.

•

Unsupported: Hardware acceleration is not enabled for the storage device.

363

Appendix D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin

Example of command output: naa.6000d3100001db0000000000094 Display Name: Volume1 Size: 20480 Device Type: Direct-Access Multipath Plugin: NMP Devfs Path: /vmfs/devices/disks/naa.6000d3100001db000000000000000094 Vendor: COMPELNT Model: Compellent Vol Revision: 0505 SCSI Level: 5 Is Pseudo: false Status: on Is RDM Capable: true Is Local: false Is Removable: false Attached Filters: VAAI_FILTER VAAI Status: unknown Other UIDs: vml.02001200006000d3100001db00000000000000013b436f6d706

Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 Follow these steps to uninstall the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin. 1 Use vMotion to move all of the virtual machines off the ESX/ESXi host or shut down all of the virtual machines and put the host into maintenance mode. 2 Find the bulletin ID of the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin by executing the following command from the vSphere CLI and looking for the text cross_dell-vaaip-compellent: esxupdate --vib-view query

Example of command output: cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.1-300727 installed 2011-10-25T14:36:17.590977+00:00

In the example above, the bulletin ID of the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin is cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.1-300727. 3 Remove the plugin by executing the following command: esxupdate remove -b bulletin-id --maintenancemode

Example of command, using the bulletin ID found in Step 2: # esxupdate remove -b cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.1-300727 --maintenancemode 4 Display the hardware acceleration claim rules on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=VAAI

Example of command output: Rule Class Filter Filter

Rule Class Type Plugin 5001 runtime vendor VAAI_FILTER 5001 file vendor VAAI_FILTER

Matches vendor=COMPELNT model=* vendor=COMPELNT model=*

Rule Class Rule Class Type Plugin Matches VAAI 5001 runtime vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=* VAAI 5001 file vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=*

364

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1

5 Remove the claim rules that have COMPELNT listed as the vendor in the Matches column by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r claimrule_ID --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r claimrule_ID --claimrule-class=VAAI

where, claimrule_ID is the number in the Rule column of the command output shown in Step 4. Example of commands: # esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r 5001 --claimrule-class=Filter # esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r 5001 --claimrule-class=VAAI

6 Reboot the ESX/ESXi host to complete the uninstallation.

Dell Compellent

365

Appendix D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin

366

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

E

Port Usage This appendix describes port usage for communicating through the network to Dell Compellent products in Storage Center.

*

Dell Compellent

Port

Protocol Name Type Usage

Purpose

22

Secure Console (SSH*)

TCP

Outbound

SSH secure communication between Storage Center and Support Center Secure SSH Servers

25

SMTP

TCP

Outbound

Sending email notifications

69

TFTP

UDP

Inbound

Configuration and boot files

88

Kerberos

TCP

Outbound

Secure communication

80/8080

HTTP

TCP

Inbound/Outbound

Automatic redirect to secure ports

123

NTP

UDP

Inbound/Outbound

Network time protocol

161

SNMP

UDP

Inbound

Communication from network manager

162

SNMP Trap

UDP

Inbound/Outbound

Sending alerts

389

LDAP

TCP

Outbound

Directory access

443/8443

HTTPS

TCP

Inbound/Outbound

•

Communicating with Storage Center applications

•

Phone Home*

514

Syslog

UDP

Outbound

Forwarding Storage Center logs to syslog servers

636

LDAPS

TCP

Outbound

Using LDAP over SSL

3033

HTTPS

TCP

Inbound/Outbound

Compellent API

3205

iSNS

TCP

Outbound

Communication with network servers

3260/ Dynamic

iSCSI Cards

TCP

Inbound/Outbound

iSCSI Initiator (server or replication source)

5000-5010

Compellent IPC

UDP

Inbound/Outbound

IPC traffic for communicating with Storage Center components

For SSH and Phone Home, set up a firewall to allow outbound communication from both controller ETH 0 IP addresses and also from the shared management IP address.

367

Appendix E Port Usage

368

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Glossary

A Assigned Disks Same as Managed Disks. Physical disks that are identified by Storage Center and to which data can be written. Assigned disks use metadata to track information about volumes on the disk and other assigned disks managed by the controller. Asynchronous Replication After data has been written to the primary storage site, new writes to that site can be accepted without having to wait for the secondary (remote) storage site to also finish its writes. Asynchronous Replication does not have the latency impact that synchronous Replication does, but if the primary site failed before the data was written to the secondary site the data that had not yet been written could be lost. See also Replication.

B Back End The component in the Storage Center SAN flow of data writes (server to switch to controller to disks) that receive data writes. In general, disk drives in enclosures are the back end of the controller. See also Target System. Backup A two step process. A Replay is first copied to a non-volatile disk remote system. In the event of problems (such as disk drive failures, power outages, or virus infection) resulting in data loss or damage to the original data, the Replay is retrieved and restored to a View Volume. Bandwidth The amount of data that can be sent to or from Storage Center.

C CHA See Compellent Host Adapter.

Dell Compellent

369

Glossary

CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an option for authentication of iSCSI communications. CHAP periodically verifies the identity of a peer using a 3-way handshake, initially when the link is established. After the Link Establishment phase is complete, the authenticator sends a challenge message to the peer. The peer responds with a value calculated using a one-way hash function. The authenticator checks the response against its own calculation of the expected hash value. If the values match, the authentication is acknowledged; if values do not match, the connection is terminated. Cache A high speed memory or storage device used to reduce the effective time required to read data from or write data to a lower speed memory or device. Storage Center provides configurable cache to minimize disk latencies. Cluster Node Server that is a member of a server cluster. Clustered Controllers More than one Storage Center controller that is interconnected (typically at high-speeds) for the purpose of improving reliability, availability, serviceability and performance (using load balancing). Storage Center provides automatic controller failover in an active-active configuration. Fully mirrored, battery backup cache provides automatic restart and volumes migrate between controllers in the event of controller failure. Compellent Host Adapter (CHA) Internal cache card/battery seated in each Storage Center controller. Write cache memory is mirrored to the cache card. On a cluster-controller Storage Center, the controller 1 cache card holds the mirror for controller 2, and the controller 2 cache card holds the mirror for controller 1. On a single-controller Storage Center, the cache card holds the mirror for the single controller. Conservation Mode Mode reached when remaining free space reaches 32 GB (or less for configurations smaller than 3.2 TB). When Storage Center enters conservation mode, System Manager generates a Conservation Mode Alert to inform you that no new volumes can be created and that it will begin to aggressively expire Replays. Control Port In virtual port mode, a Control Port is created for each iSCSI fault domain. iSCSI Servers connect to the Storage Center using the Control Port. The Control Port redirects a connection to the appropriate virtual port. Controller Provides disk aggregation (RAID), I/O routing, error detection, and data recovery. Provides the intelligence for the entire Storage Center subsystem. Every Storage Center contains at least one. Copy-Mirror-Migrate Storage Center feature allowing volumes to be migrated between different disk types and RAID levels.

370

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

D DNS (Domain Name Service) Name of the TCP/IP stack that converts domain names into IP addresses. Data Instant Replay Ensures high system and application availability. Enables backup and recovery of volumes without impacting resources. Captures a point in time copy, based on the Replay Profile. This provides the ability to roll back a volume to a previous point in time. Only data that has changed from the previous point in time copy is stored. Data Progression Automatically migrates data to the right class of storage based on assigned or recommended policies. Allows businesses to optimize utilization of storage resources through migration to the appropriate class of storage devices, to higher or to lower performance devices, based on data access requirements. Deduplication Deduplication copies only the changed portions of a Replay, rather than all data captured in each Replay. Disaster Recovery The ability to recover from the loss of a complete site, whether due to natural disaster or malicious intent. Storage Center disaster recovery includesData Instant replay and Remote Instant Replay. Disk Folders A collection of physical disks that can be assigned attributes by the user. Performance is improved by maximizing the number of disk drives in a folder. Volumes draw storage from disk folders. Folders may be associated with multiple pagepools. Disk Position The position of the disk in the enclosure. An example of a disk position is 01-01. The first number is the row number, from the top of the enclosure. The second number is column number from the left of the enclosure. For example, Disk 01-02 is in the first (top row) and second column from the left. Dual Redundancy See Redundancy. Dynamic Capacity Mandatory application program that enables an administrator to allocate space only when data is physically written to the volume. Dynamic capacity reduces storage expenditures by consuming physical disk space only when data is written to a volume. Dynamic Controllers A minimum of two Storage Center clustered controllers that provide automatic failover by using an internal heartbeat.

Dell Compellent

371

Glossary

E Emergency Mode Mode reached when the Storage Cener can no longer operate because there is no more free space. Enclosure The box that holds the disks. Provides disk status, temperature sensors, cooling fans, an alarm system, and a single interface to the controller. Ethernet A protocol that defines a common set of rules and signals for networks. Eth0 Ethernet port 0. Storage Center uses Eth0 to support log on, access the GUI, Replication, and to send email, alerts, SNMP traps, and Phone Home data. Eth1 Storage Center uses Eth1 for dedicated InterProcess Communication between controllers in a multicontroller configuration.

F Fabric A combination of interconnected switches that act as a unified routing infrastructure. It allows multiple connections among devices on a SAN and lets new devices enter unobtrusively. A FC (or iSCSI) topology with at least one switch present on the network. FastTrack An optional Storage Center utility that dynamically places the most active data on the outer (faster) disk tracks. Fault Domain A fault domain identifies a failover set. In virtual port mode, all front-end ports can be part of the one fault domain. In Legacy Mode, each primary and reserved port creates one fault domain. Fibre Channel A high-speed interconnect used to connect servers to Storage Center controllers and back-end disk enclosures. FC components include HBAs, hubs, switches, and cabling. The term FC also refers to a highspeed, fully duplexed serial communication protocol permitting data transfer rates of up to 10 Gigabit per second. FluidFS The Dell Fluid File System (FluidFS) is a scalable NAS with up to eight controllers in a cluster. Front End The component in the Storage Center SAN flow of data writes (server to switch to controller to disks) that initiates data writes. In general, servers (or switches) are the front end of the controller. However, a Storage Center that is replicating data to a remote system is the front end of the remote system. See also Back End.

372

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

G GUI Graphical User Interface.

H High Availability A continuously available system is characterized as having essentially no downtime in any given year. A system with 99.999% availability experiences only about five minutes of downtime. In contrast, a high availability system is defined as having 99.9% uptime, which translates into a few hours of planned or unplanned downtime each year. HBA (Host Bus Adapter) The HBA is the intelligent hardware residing on the host server that controls the transfer of data between the host and the Storage Center. HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol. Hot Spare A Hot Spare disk is a backup disk. In the event that an active array fails, the controller makes the Hot Spare part of the active array and rebuilds data on the fly. Although the Hot Spare becomes an active disk without human intervention, remember to replace the failed drive as soon as possible, so that the array is again protected with a new Hot Spare. Hot spares can span multiple disk enclosures. A Storage Center Hot Spares can have a different capacity than the data drive it replaces.

I Initiator A source Storage Center that initiates Replication. Data is copied from an initiator to a Target System. IO Input/output. The process of moving data between a computer system's main memory and an external device or interface such as a storage device, display, printer, or network connected to other computer systems. IO is a collective term for reading, or moving data into a computer system's memory, and writing, or moving data from a computer system's memory to another location. iSCSI iSCSI (Internet SCSI) is the specification that defines the encapsulation of SCSI packets over ethernet using the TCP/IP transport protocol, or a protocol that enables transport of block data over IP networks, without the need for a specialized network infrastructure, such as FC.

Dell Compellent

373

Glossary

L Lead Controller In a dual-controller configuration, the leader controller is the primary controller. Under ordinary circumstances, the controllers share read/write duties, thus doubling IOs. In the event the peer controller fails, the lead controller assumes the duties of both controllers. See also Peer Controller. Legacy Mode Non-virtual port mode. in Legacy Mode, fault domains associate Primary and Reserved front-end ports to each other as opposed to Virtual Mode where all front-end ports can be part of the same fault domain. Load Balancing Referring to the ability to redistribute load (read/write requests) to an alternate path between server and storage device, load balancing maintain high performance IO. LUN A logical unit is a conceptual division (a subunit) of a storage disk or a set of disks. Each logical unit has an address, known as the logical unit number (LUN), which allows it to be uniquely identified.

M MAC Address In computer networking a Media Access Control address (MAC address) is a quasi-unique identifier attached to most network adapters (NICs). It is a number that acts like a name for a particular network adapter, so, for example, the network cards (or built-in network adapters) in two different computers will have different names, or MAC addresses. It is possible to change the MAC address. Management IP Address Address used to connect to Storage Center. Each controller has its own IP address, but the management IP address remains constant. Managed Disks Disks that are grouped together to form a discrete bundle, across which data is striped and from which volumes are created. Manual Replay Storage Center feature that allows the user to manually create point-in-time copies of volumes. Mapping (Volume to Server) Mapping defines which servers can access specific volumes. After this linkage is established, the volume will appear to the server as a single, local disk drive of the specified size. Mentoring Controller During installation or after replacing or adding a controller, the mentoring controller copies configuration information to the new or added controller. Either the lead or peer controller can become a mentoring controller.

374

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Multipathing Redundant storage components that transfer data between server and storage. These components include cabling, adapters, switches, and the software that enables multipathing.

N NPIV Mode N_Port ID Virtualization is a prerequisite for enabling FC virtual ports. If a switch does not accept NPIV, FC ports cannot be converted to Virtual Ports and NPIV is turned off. NTP The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems over packet-switched, variable-latency data networks.

P Pagepool A pool of storage. Pagepool Alert The first alert generated when the pagepool space consumed by volumes and Replays exceeds the configurable pagepool alert threshold, and there is no more free disk space available for the pagepool to consume. Peer Controller The peer controller is the equal of the Lead controller. In a dual-controller configuration, both controllers share read/write duties, thus doubling IO. In the event the lead controller fails, the peer controller assumes the duties of both controllers. Port The physical connection point on servers, switches, Storage Center controller, and disk drive enclosures that is used to connect to other devices. Ports on a FC network are identified by their Worldwide Port Name (WWPN); on iSCSI networks, ports are given an iSCSI name. Preallocation Pre-allocating storage physically assigns storage to the volume before its use by the server. Not allowed for volumes already having Replays.

Q QoS Definition Quality of Service. A networking term that specifies a guaranteed throughput level to guarantee end-to end latency will not exceed a specified level.

Dell Compellent

375

Glossary

R RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) A way of encoding data over multiple physical disks to ensure that if a hard disk fails a redundant copy of the data can be accessed instead. Example schemes include mirroring and RAID-5. RAID 0 Stripes data but provides no redundancy. If one disk fails, all data is lost. Do not use RAID 0 unless data is backed up elsewhere. RAID 5-5 and 5-9 Maintains a logical copy of the data using a mathematically derived rotating parity stripe across 5 or 9 disks. The parity stripe is derived from the data stripes. This method has less overhead for the redundant information than RAID 10; however write performance is slower than RAID 10 due to the calculation of the parity stripe for every write.RAID 5 protects against data loss when any single disk fails. RAID 5-5 is 80% efficient. RAID 5-9 is 89% efficient. RAID 6-6 and 6-10 RAID 6 protects against data loss when any 2 disks fail. RAID 6-6 is 67% efficient. RAID 6-10 is 80% efficient. RAID 10 Striped and mirrored. Provides both data availability and top performance. Maintains a minimum of one full copy of all data on the volume. RAID 10 provides optimum Read / Write performance, increased probability of withstanding multiple failures, and the fastest restoration of data. RAID 10-DM RAID 10 Dual Mirror provides maximum protection for storage. Data is written simultaneously to three separate disks. All three disks return a write acknowledgement. RAID 10 protects against data loss when any 2 disks fail. Redundancy The duplication of information or hardware equipment components to ensure that if a primary resource fails, a secondary resource can take over its function. Storage Center provides redundancy for each component so that there is no single point of failure. Single Redundancy protects against loss of data if any one disk fails. Dual Redundancy protects against data lost if any two disks fail. Remote System A Storage Center that sends or receives Replication data. Remote Instant Replay Remote Instant Replay is a Replay written to a remote backup site. The sites can be active-active, with bidirectional remote copies that can either have matched or split intervals. Also knows as Replication. Remote System A Storage Center that is receiving Replication data.

376

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

Replay A fully usable copy of a defined collection of data that contains an image of the data as it appeared at the point in time at which the copy was initiated. Replay Profile Set of rules for taking Replays that is applied to all volumes using that profile. Replication Replication is the process of duplicating data from one highly available site to another. The Replication process can be synchronous or asynchronous; duplicates are known as Replays.

S SAN (Storage Area Network) A storage area network (SAN) is a specialized network that provides access to high performance and highly available storage subsystems using block storage protocols. The SAN is made up of specific devices, such as host bus adapters (HBAs) in the host servers, switches that help route storage traffic, and disk storage subsystems. The main characteristic of a SAN is that the storage subsystems are generally available to multiple hosts at the same time, which makes them scalable and flexible. Compare with NAS. SBOD Switched Bunch of Disks. SCSI SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) is a collection of ANSI standards that define IO buses primarily intended for connecting storage devices to servers. Server Servers define connectivity to the Storage Center. They allow you to associate your server name to the hardware connectivity presented by the server for easy identification. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) defines a message format and forwarding procedure to enable messages to be sent between hosts on the Internet. Snapshot See Replay. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet-standard Layer-7 (application layer) protocol for collecting information from and configuring network devices such as servers, hubs, switches, and routers on an Internet Protocol (IP) network. SNMP can be used to collect information about network statistics from these devices and to relay this information to a central management console to monitor network health, trap errors, perform diagnostics, and generate reports. Storage Center™ A complete storage solution that provides unified physical storage and storage management. Storage Center Architecture integrates multiple disk technologies with multiple interfaces and controllers.

Dell Compellent

377

Glossary

Storage Clustering Storage Center software providing automatic controller failover through multiple controllers in an activeactive configuration. Fully mirrored, battery backup cache provides automatic restart in the event of a controller failure. Storage Pool An undifferentiated pool of available disk space from which Storage Center creates volumes. Storage Profile A collection of rules that identify RAID level and drive types (tiers) on which data is stored. All volumes are attached to a Storage Profile. Storage Profiles can be applied by default, to each volume, to a group or all volumes. If RAID levels or tiers in a Storage Profile change, data in volumes attached to that Storage Profile is moved by Data Progression to the new RAID levels or tiers. Storage Type Pool of storage from which volumes are created. Storage Center is most efficient when all disks are combined into one pool of storage. Data Progression can then store data with maximum efficiency. In some circumstances, you can create additional based on redundancy and data page size. Synchronous Replication In synchronous Replication, each write to the primary disk and the secondary (remote) disk must be complete before the next write can begin. The advantage of this approach is that the two sets of data are always synchronized. The disadvantage is that if the distance between the two storage disks is substantial, the Replication process can take a long time and slows down the writing of data. See also asynchronous Replication.

T Target System The Storage Center that receives Replication data from an initiating Storage Center. See Initiator. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Thin Provisioning Volume sizes can be defined that are greater than the actual physical storage. Storage space is only used when data is written. Thin Provisioning allows organizations to reduce their overall disk expenditures, increase availability and achieve greater performance. Tiers Blocks of data that are stored according to its intended use. For example, data that has been accessed within the last four progression cycles is stored on the highest tier, composed of the fastest disks. Data that has not been accessed for the last 12 progression cycles is gradually migrated down to the lowest tier, composed of slower, cheaper, larger disks. Transport Type The protocol used to communicate data between the Storage Center and attached servers.

378

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

U Unassigned Disk Disk drives that have not been assigned to a managed disk folder and therefore cannot be used by the Storage Center. Sometimes referred to as an unassigned disk. UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply. A power supply that includes a battery that will keep Storage Center running in the event of a power outage. Power from the battery will last long enough to save data in RAM and shut Storage Center down gracefully.

V View Volume A volume that has been recreated from a previous Replay. Virtual Port Virtual ports eliminate the need for reserve ports. When operating in Virtual Port Mode, all front-end ports accept IO and can be part of one fault domain. Virtualization The amalgamation of multiple network storage devices into what appears to be a single storage unit. Virtualization makes tasks such as archiving, back-up, and recovery easier and faster. Virtualization is implemented through the Storage Center controller software. Volume A volume is a discrete area of storage striped to multiple hard disks. Volume Type Volume Type can be Dynamic, Replay Enabled, or Replication. A volume is dynamic until at least one Replay has been taken of that volume. After a Replay has been taken of a volume, it becomes Replay Enabled. A Replication volume is one that is being Replicated to another Storage Center.

W WWN World Wide Name.

Dell Compellent

379

Glossary

380

Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide

680-019-013 A